Home

Acu-Rite 516353-21 Automobile Accessories User Manual

1. aame MP f you encounter any problems with the provided software Everio Bien pn MediaBrowser 4 please consult the Pixela User Support Center z a L_ click j Iams I Telephone USA and Canada English 1 800 458 4029 toll free Europe UK Germany France and Spain oe l l English German French Spanish 800 1532 4865 toll Click Select all to select all the displayed files free e After selecting click Next Other Countries in Europe 5 e Click Settings to select the disc type Set the title of the top menu of the disc English German French Spanish 44 1489 564 764 Asia Philippines English 63 2 438 0090 China Chinese 10800 163 0014 toll free http www pixela co jp oem jvc mediabrowser e FN Step 2 AVCHD Confirm Ghatak bign m g Humonr of Thaw Namber of cscs 122m x7 arty Click Settings to select the menu background e After setting click Start 6 After copying is complete click OK 125 Copying 126 lea MediaBrowser 4 Memo The following types of discs can be used on the provided software Everio MediaBrowser 4 DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW e The following formats are supported by the provided software Everio MediaBrowser 4 AVCHD For details refer to the Pixela homepage http www pixela co jp oem jvc mediabrowser e e Use Everio M
2. Tap to return to the previous screen e Tap X to exit the menu CN oO 3 Tap MENU 4 Tap PLAYBACK SETTING yay SELECT DATE ESTEE Bee ws NEXT 70 Playback After selecting a date tap NEXT E Types of Digest Playback When ALL is tapped Digest Playback will be performed for all the Select the types of Digest Playback from the following When AUTO is dates selected playback is performed by shortening the video to the pre set length of time e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 7 Tap to select a scene for Digest Playback Playback is performed by shortening the video to the pre set length of time Depending on the recording time of the video playback time can be selected from 1 minute 3 minutes 5 minutes 10 minutes 15 minutes 30 minutes 45 minutes and 60 minutes All the recorded parts recording time is less than 1 minute are played back pa DIGEST PLAYBACK AUTO SMILING FACE SCENE REGISTERED FACE SCN MARKED SCENE MARKED SCENE SMILING FACE Playback the scenes with detected smiles as a digest Set SMILE SHOT in RECORD SETTING to ON e Error message is displayed if no scene is found Select another Capturing Smiles Automatically SMILE SHOT scene or tap AUTO n p 45 8 Select the Digest Playback time Only when AUTO is selected in Step 7 ae DIGEST TIME
3. Check if the recording mode is pili f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap sii to switch the mode to video You can also use the i I button e Check if the recording mode is pi on this unit f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap viii to switch the mode to video You can also use the 8 0 button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode 7 REC 4 Tap pause If at the desired scene during playback CJ p CEECEE TERES 0 01 23 m G 0 12 34 4 Tap EDIT Aea ea Caa C gt gt gt gt am e After pausing the video you can fine tune the point to capture by tapping forward slow motion and reverse slow motion lt q 5 Press the SNAPSHOT button 5 Tap SEAMLESS REC CTRL vag EDIT Memo Still images are captured with a size of 1920x1080 e Captured still images are stored in the media where the video is being played back from 83 Editing 6 Tap COMBINE SCENES SEAMLESS REC CTRL COMBINE SCENES This unit starts a search to detect seamless videos Combining cannot be performed if no seamless videos are found 7 Tap YES THE ABOVE SCENE IS FOUND COMBINE WITH THIS SCENE 8 Tap the media to store to SELECT THE MEDIA T
4. Memo This mode is not available in the playback mode SMILE NAME DISPLAY is set to ON when the demo mode is activated Setting SMILE NAME DISPLAY amp p 50 TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST Adjusts the response position of the buttons on the touch screen Adjusting the Touch Panel t p 15 FACTORY PRESET Returns all the settings to their default values FIRMWARE UPDATE Updates the functions of this unit to the latest version For details refer to the JVC homepage When no program to update the software of this unit is available nothing will be provided on the homepage http wwws jvckenwood com english support index html PC SOFTWARE UPDATE Updates the built in PC software of this unit to the latest version For details refer to the JVC homepage When no program to update the computer software is available nothing will be provided on the homepage http wwws jvckenwood com english support index html 239 Settings Menu OPEN SOURCE LICENSES recording only Displays the open source software licenses that are used in this unit 240 Settings Menu CONNECTION SETTINGS video still image DISPLAY ON TV Displays icons and date time on a TV screen Does not display icons and date time on TV VIDEO OUTPUT Sets the aspect ratio 16 9 or 4 3 according to the connecting TV Select this when connecting to a conventional TV 4 3 16 9 Select this when connecting to a
5. __H ___ __ _ 4 Operate from a smartphone e Prior to use this function a smartphone application needs to be installed i on the smartphone Installing Smartphone Applications p 175 Start Everio sync 2 on the smartphone after setting DIRECT MONITORING 201 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 e How to operate from a smartphone INDOOR MONITORING Using Smartphone Applications p 175 Mi Computer Windows 7 Mi Setting Once setting is done start from the Regular Operation below Tap the URL button shown on the camera s screen displayed when the computer and the camera are connected Create a OR code wirelessly W Enter values in the required items for indoor monitoring e Password set a password to connect this camera to the device via access point Not more than 8 characters e HTTP Port Normally set to 80 Display the screen for reading the QR code I Tap MENU Operation on this camera The URL for the computer to connect to appears 2 Checkthe URL being displayed on the camera screen which starts from http CAMERA NETWORK INFO URL LAN http meet W MCE OE ena e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi icon Operation on this camera After checking the URL tap QUIT to return to the previous screen ae TOP MENU 3 Start Internet Explorer web browser on the computer
6. Playing Back with a DVD Writer p 105 Copying Playing Back with a DVD Writer You can play back the DVDs created on this unit Connect this unit to the DVD writer and TV If this unit is not connected to a TV images can be played back on the LCD monitor of this unit USB Cable HDMI Mini Cable Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD3 p 99 Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD50 p 99 Tap PLAYBACK in the BACK UP menu Ci VIDEO BACKUP CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE PLAYBACK e An index screen thumbnail display of the videos in the disc appears 3 Tap onthe file to start playback Tap to return to the BACK UP menu e For details on video playback refer to Operation Buttons for Video Playback s p 64 Operation Buttons for Video Playback t p 64 e To exit stop playback and turn off the camcorder by pressing the button for about 2 seconds Then disconnect the USB cable Memo To play back the recorded image on TV connect this unit via the HDMI mini cable or the AV Cord while this unit is connected to the DVD writer Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector t p 77 Connecting via the AV Connector t p 79 Creating a Disc Using a Connected Blu ray Recorder You can create discs using a Blu ray recorder by connecting it to this unit using a USB cable The following is a screen of the model with the buil
7. Sew ws 0 999 e a JAO TOTAL 00h00m ADD e Repeat steps 8 9 and arrange the videos in the playlist To change the position of a video in the playlist lower row select the insertion point with lt after step 8 and tap ADD appears when the inserted video is selected Tap to deselect Tap on the selected video again to check the video After checking tap gt e To delete of a video in the playlist lower row tap the video then tap CANCEL indicates the size of the video 10 After arranging tap SAVE FROM SCENE 0 999 TELE A mg TOTAL DVD 01 00h00m DVD DL 1 E 11 Tap YES QUIT PLAYLIST SAVE EDITED CONTENTS Memo e Tap X on each screen to exit the menu Editing Creating Playlists by Date Create a playlist by arranging multiple files according to recording date e The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Openthe LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is pil f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si to switch the mode to video You can also use the sifi IOl button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode 4 Tap EDIT 7 Tap CREATE BY DATE ax EDIT PLAYLIST CREATE FROM SCENE CREATE BY DATE 8 Tap on the video of the date to add to playlist ya FRO
8. e SET is deactivated when no file is selected 8 Tap YES 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode MOVE VIDEO PLAY Hi Rec menu MOVE QUANTITY 30 The mode changes between recording and playback with every tap START MOVING 3 Tap MENU Moving of files starts e After moving tap OK 4 Tap EDIT 6 Tap on the files to move 113 Copying Copying to Windows PC GZ EX355 GZ EX310 You can copy files to a computer using the provided software Discs can also be created using the computer s DVD or Blu ray drive If the provided software is not installed this unit will be recognized as an external storage when connected Memo To record to discs a recordable DVD or Blu ray drive is required for the computer in use e Still images cannot be recorded to discs using the provided software e Videos recorded in the iFrame format can not be copied e In order to record on the Blu ray disc it is necessary to upgrade to the paid version of LoiLoFit for Everio For details refer to the following link http oilo tv jp product 33 page 27 e Backing up of files using other softwares is not supported Trouble with Using the Provided Software LoiLoFit for Everio Consult the customer service center below http loilo tv us product LoiLoFit_for Everio For details on how to upload to YouTube refer to Help in LoiLoFit for Everio Verif
9. I Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt PLAY The top menu appears HL Rec menu 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera wag TOP MENU 3 Tap DETECT MAIL Operation on this camera ma nn 4 Tap DETECTION INTERVAL Operation on this camera DETECT MAIL DETECTION INTERVAL e Set the interval to perform detection By default itis set to 10 minutes 163 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Setting Self Recording on this Camera DETECT MAIL SETTING Sets whether to record videos on this camera during detection I Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt lt PLAY li menu e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera Mai TOP MENU 3 Tap DETECT MAIL Operation on this camera Wi Fi Poa PNS ee 4 Tap SELF RECORDING Operation on this camera DETECT MAIL SELF RECORDING OFF ON e Select ON to record videos on this camera Select OFF not to record videos on this camera 164 Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS There are 4 ways to register the access points wireless LAN router for connection Wi Fi Protected This is the easiest way of registration Setup WPS Authentication method and wireless LAN setup are Registration performed automatically in WPS allowing easy registrati
10. Scenes can be detected according to the shooting conditions and automatically adjusted in Intelligent Auto mode Multiple scenes may be detected depending on the recording conditions e Some functions may not work properly depending on the shooting conditions TT TTT ELT 25 Recording Using the Silent Mode When the Silent mode is used the LCD monitor darkens and operation sounds will not be output Use this mode to record quietly in dark places such as during a performance Press and hold the SILENT button to turn on the Silent mode The Silent mode can be cancelled by holding down the button again e WN appears when SILENT MODE is set to ON Useful Settings for Recording When QUICK RESTART is set to ON this unit turns on immediately if you open the LCD monitor within 5 minutes after the power is turned off by closing the monitor QUICK RESTART 1 p 239 When AUTO POWER OFF is set to ON this unit turns itself off automatically to conserve power when it is not operated for 5 minutes only when using the battery pack AUTO POWER OFF e p 239 e When TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF is set to FACE TRACKING this unit detects faces and automatically adjusts its brightness and focus to record the faces more clearly Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF t p 44 e f the remaining space on the built in memory run
11. A on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap M to switch the recording mode to Manual lt PLAY The top menu appears 5 Tap RECORD SETTING iil Rec _ MENU Recording ya TOP MENU TA x 6 Tap the item to set manually RECORD SETTING x aia ee For details on the various manual settings refer to Manual Recording Menu Manual Recording Menu The following items can be set O am OO o SCENE SELECT Recordings that suit the shooting conditions can be performed easily Shooting According to Scene Subject t p 32 FOCUS Use manual focus if the subject is not focused automatically Adjusting Focus Manually t p 33 BRIGHTNESS e Overall brightness on the screen can be ADJUST adjusted e Use this when recording in a dark or bright location Adjusting Brightness p 34 BACKLIGHT COMP e Corrects the image when the subject appears dark due to backlight e Use this when shooting against the light Setting Backlight Compensation t p 35 WHITE BALANCE e Overall color on the screen can be adjusted e Use this when the color on the screen appears differently from the actual color Setting White Balance t p 36 TELE MACRO e Use this to take close up macro shots of the subject Taking Close up Shots t p 37 31 Recording Shooting According t
12. INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO EXIT appears change the disc 10 Tap OK when COMPLETED is displayed CREATE BY DATE COMPLETED 1 1 Press and hold the 9 button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit and disconnect the USB cable Caution e Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is complete e Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied Special files cannot be copied either e All DVDs will be finalized automatically While files cannot be added to the DVD R DVD RW later files can still be added to the BD R BD RE e DVDs that are created in DVD AVCHD format are playable only on AVCHD compatible devices Memo 94 Copying Copying Selected Playlists 6 Tap on the playlist to copy to disc Arrange and copy the created playlists in the order you like 0 999 e The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory vl asi Hiei l oe W Y Sani Select video mode a AE eran TOTAL 2 Tap SELECT AND CREATE 00h00m wd VIDEO BACKUP CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE e appears on the selected playlist upper row Tap to deselect e Tap on the selected playlist again to check the content of the playlist After checking tap 5 Tap lt gt or move the zoom lever to display the previous next playlist PLAYBACK 3 Tap Blu ray DISC or DVD AVCHD 7
13. MENU HL Rec menu The top menu appears 3 Tap SPECIAL RECORDING Go to step 4 Alternatively tap ANIMATION EFFECT in the shortcut menu Go to step 5 ya TOP MENU L R F k ss at 4 Tap ANIMATION EFFECT nia SPECIAL RECORDING HI ToD Aa al a Op e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 5 Select a desired effect and tap SET Tap lt or gt to change the effect Press the START STOP button the camera to start recording Press again to stop To select another effect again after tapping SET tap 5 Tap X to exit ANIMATION EFFECT To perform operations other than recording tap X to cancel the ANIMATION EFFECT first 39 Recording Tae aa EE ee Sea ai eg HE Cee Bi ciii Bi ciii HE ciii BET cats ose ose Animation effect appears when smiles are detected Animation effect appears when smiles are detected Animation effect appears when smiles are detected Animation effect appears when smiles are detected Animation effect appears when the screen is touched Animation effect appears when the screen is touched Animation effect appears when the screen is touched Animation effect appears when the screen is touched Recording Recording with Face Decorations DECORATE FACE EFFECT Detects faces and enables dec
14. OUTDOOR MONITORING Talo CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS Demo Tap the current connection type e Recording screen appears 3 Tap Index 179 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 osan HPAUSE dim af a ele pe snapshot Wide Pause Marking Game Score m 4 Inthe index screen tap the desired images to transfer ai 2343 OOhO m1 8s aa 2245 o0hO1 mes P 17 16 00h02m10s E 14 19 OOhO0ms36s C3 iFrame Still Image e Confirm that the AVCHD tab is indicated in the lower part of the screen 5 Files are displayed as a split files by certain lengths of time Enter the check mark 4 to the files to transfer and tap the transfer mark icon on the lower right 180 00 00 00 00 03 00 00 03 00 00 07 18 Q Number of the selected image files is indicated next to the check mark in lower left To set the length of video you are transferring refer to the below instructions Smartphone Application Settings p 186 _ oo 6 Tap TRANSFER YOU CAN TRANSFER VIDEOS OR STILL IMAGES TO THE SMARTPHONE TRANSFER CANCEL e Tap CANCEL to cancel the operation 7 TRANSFER starts Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 pm gt gt PREPARING TO TRANSFER 11 1
15. To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage Unable to set focus For DETECT MAIL SETTING e While on standby for notification mails the focus is fixed Perform the camera settings first then enable notification mails Focus may not be set correctly if the notification mails start before camera settings are made In this case disable notification mails temporarily then enable it again Vide Still Image Transmission Unable to transfer videos and still images to e Check the amount of remaining free space in the destination medium smartphone or computer smartphone or computer 195 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Wi Fi Specifications Wi Fi Specifications Wireless LAN Standard IEEE802 11b g n 2 4GHz band Wi Fi security Encryption WEP WPA WPA2 WPA and WPA2 are supported only by the personal mode PSK DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING Mi When Using Everio sync 2 Supported Terminals iPhone iPad iPod touch iOS 5 1 or later Android Android 2 3 or later e There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all terminals e Everio sync 2 for iPhone iPad cannot be used when the iPhone iPad is connected to the mobile phone network To make use of this feature connect to the camera or an access point via Wi Fi A network environment with a minimum line speed of about
16. Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera Operation on this camera wig TOP MENU S Beane m le A a a TA i Law Tap TV MONITORING 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera Tap MAC ADDRESS LIST Tap ADD CO Hm AQ Enter the MAC address of the TV monitor e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters Tap DELETE to delete a character Tap CANCEL to exit e Tap A a 1 to change the characters Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right e After setting tap SET For details on checking the MAC address for registration refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 5 Tap MAC ADDRESS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING The MAC address of the camera appears The above shows the address during direct connection while the below shows the MAC address when connected to an access point e After setting tap SET After checking tap SET 177 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 PASSWORD Protecting the Network Settings with a Password Sets a password to lock and protect the network settings I Tap MENU Operation on this camera Enter the 4 digit numbers e Tap DELETE to delete a character e Tap CANCEL to exit i EALEN Tap lt or to move one spa
17. iFrame 1280x720 Records videos that are suitable for editing in 1280x720 resolution GZ EX355 GZ EX310 iFrame 960x540 Records videos that are suitable for editing in 960x540 resolution GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Memo Set to UXP or XP mode when recording fast moving scenes or scenes with extreme changes of brightness to avoid noise e Use an BD writer external Blu ray drive to save videos recorded in UXP mode e You can change to the desired VIDEO QUALITY by tapping on it from the remaining recording time display ZOOM Sets the maximum zoom ratio Enables recording with 1 40x optical zoom Set this when digital zoom is not desired 60x DYNAMIC Enables recording with 1 40x optical zoom and 41 60x dynamic zoom when the image stabilizer is in 55x DYNAMIC normal mode or set to off Enables recording with 1 40x optical zoom and 41 55x dynamic zoom when the image stabilizer is in active mode or when the camera is set to the iFrame mode 120x DIGITAL Enables recording with 1 40x optical zoom and 41 120x digital zoom when the camera is set to the AVCHD 110x DIGITAL mode Enables recording with 1 40x optical zoom and 41 110x digital Zoom when the camera is set to the iFrame mode 200x DIGITAL Enables recording with 1 40x optical zoom and 41 200x digital zoom Memo When digital zoom is used the image becomes grainy as it is digitally enlarged The angle of view changes
18. same time E Battery Pack Prepare a battery pack that is ready for three times the expected recording time in a day For example if you plan to record for 2 hours a day prepare a battery pack that is ready for 6 hours actual recording time For a day trip you can prepare a battery with low capacity but for a long trip do prepare a few batteries with high capacities E AC Adapter The JVC AC adapter supports voltages from 110 V to 240 V and hence can be used anywhere in the world Bring along the adapter if you are traveling for a long time Charge the battery pack while sleeping so that you can record with full battery power the next day WE Power Plug Adapter The shape of the power plug varies according to countries Be sure to check the shape of the power plug beforehand and bring the appropriate power plug adapter Charging the Battery Pack Overseas t p 21 Useful Shooting Techniques E Battery Charger Using Pan at the Places of Interest Tourists spots with beautiful scenery or historical sites are places that you would certainly want to record To capture the magnificence of a scene which cannot be fitted into a single frame try the panning technique Refer to Shooting Tips found in the Beginner s Guide on this website on how to use panning effectively In addition you may also like to take a shot of the signs or monuments that can often be found at the tourist spots Recording cann
19. 1 Registering an access point Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS c p 164 2 Setting the account for sending e mails Setting the Sender s E mail Address of the Camera t p 159 3 Registering the recipient s e mail address for notification mails up to 8 addresses Registering the Recipient s E mail Address of the Camera t p 161 Operation Method I Tap MENU Set the camera to the recording mode lt PLAY The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon HL Rec menu ya TOP MENU 4 3a oy 3 Tap DETECT MAIL Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Wi Fi Pi aTh boas MOTION DETECTION MOTION DETECTION Rr am ol IN PROGRESS p het ha l E 4 Tap DETECT MAIL ATTN The PHOTO icon appears on the screen for about 2 seconds upon E detection DETECT MAIL Images are captured automatically when moving subjects or human faces appear on the camera s screen The PHOTO icon appears on the screen upon detection The captured still images will be sent via e mail to the selected recipients 10 Detection suspended 5 Select DETECT MAIL ATTN then tap MOTION DETECTION DETECTION SUSPENDED DUE TO DETECT MAIL ATTN IET eee BI ee Bee Bs VRAD ee eee Bs Until the next detection is made detection is suspended for the pre set length of time e ee a
20. Adjusting the Touch Panel t p 15 e The writings and drawings are deleted when the handwriting mode ends or when the power is turned off 5 Tap HANDWRITING EFFECT e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 43 Recording Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF TOUCH PRIORITY AE AP is a function that adjusts focus and brightness based on a tapped position By registering the face of a person beforehand you can enable tracking of the person even without specific selection during recording This function is available for both videos and still images The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions I Open the LCD monitor Set the recording mode to either vi video or still image To switch the mode between video and still image tap sil or Cl on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si or to switch the mode to video or still image respectively You can also use the sii IAl button on this unit 2 Tap MENU lt PLAY e The top menu appears 3 Tap RECORD SETTING yay TOP MENU iil Rec _ MENU 4 Tap gt onthe lower right of the screen yay RECORD SETTING AD AE ore 5 Tap TOUCH PRIORITY AE AP ving RECORD SETTING Ea RA at py gt ei Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 44 6 Tap the desired sett
21. CANCEL e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice lt i MENU or C by tapping 3 times e Tap DELETE to delete a character gt The Pen ap peat Tap CANCEL to exit 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon e Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower Operation on this camera case letter and number e Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right e After setting tap SET Memo e Only the JVC dynamic DNS service can be set on this camera ya TOP MENU 3 Tap OUTDOOR MONITORING 12t Operation on this camera Wi Fi 4 Tap DDNS SETTING Operation on this camera OUTDOOR MONITORING 5 Tap DDNS then tap ON Operation on this camera 158 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Setting the Sender s E mail Address of the Camera Sets the address to be used for sending e mails on the camera Memo e By using Gmail as the sender s mail address some of the settings can be omitted Use of Gmail is recommended for users who have a Gmail account I Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt PLAY The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ii Rec menu yay TOP MENU 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Opera
22. HD MEMORY CAMERA Detailed User Guide GZ E300 Table of Contents Beginners Guide naicsiccsnisecntecanmectizeskieecavacenstinnecsenecentawses 4 Holiday Season Christmas sgisecssvecccseavenccovasivendareucdseasetenusiedotmes 5 WF OCG E EE E A TEE A E T E E 6 MW EA OA AEE ENE E E OAE ETE E E ET 7 Amusement Park s s snsssnsesssssssersssrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrrerrersrresrrrerrrrenneee 9 Getting Started Verifying the Accessories ccccceecceceeeeeeeeeeeaaseeeeeeesaaeneeees 11 Charging the Battery Pack sssssssssssesnnnsrensrnnrrresrnrnnressrrrnrene 12 Grip AGJUSUNEME ecserin enan EEEE A eai 13 Using as Hand oy 2 ceaeenmer nee eenen ene nre sient er enei ene nertnree 13 PASE UG lS CaN cc cetcucasnantiaenetaumouncusteputdeacastteneeceacedteveus 13 Types of Usable SD Card ccccccseseeeeeseseeeseeesseeeesaaes 14 Using the TOUCH Screen cccccccceeeseeeeeeceeneseeeeeeeeaneeeeeeeeaas 15 Adjusting the Touch Panel ccccecssssereeeeeeereeneneeeeens 15 Names of Buttons and Functions on the LCD Monitor 16 CIC GK 56 NING A E E EE 18 Resetting the Clock cccccecceesesesseeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeseaneeeeeeeeeas 19 Changing the Display Language sseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 20 Holding this CUE eee creeats cs cetermdesodgeteaisiagatactsadodeedeaaedueeensancseataiact 20 Tripod Mounting asadcctaateareacneticancureyeacelenianaessnstencorsnasersaontetesettes 21 Using this Unit
23. REC RT MENU The top menu appears e The search results appear on the camera s screen 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon 8 Tap the name SSID of the desired access point from the list of search Operation on this camera results Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU SEARCH 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera 9 Register a password Operation on this camera 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING e Operation on this camera Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times e Tap DELETE to delete a character e Tap CANCEL to exit e Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number e Tap amp or gt to move one space to the left or right The password is not required if the wireless LAN router is not security protected 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS i 0 1 H i 77 pE J i Operation on this camera After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS KOLNES REGISTERED ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 6 Tap ADD e Other methods such as Manual Registration and WPS PIN Operation on this camera Registration are also available Refer to the follow
24. SMILE SHOT SMILE NAME DISPLAY and BACKLIGHT COMP manual mode only lt Shortcut Menu During Still Image Recording Mode gt J SHORTCUT MENU 6 e Allows settings of EASY STORAGE SMILE SHOT SMILE NAME DISPLAY and BACKLIGHT COMP manual mode only Memo To return to the top menu Tap return To exit the screen Tap X quit To display the help file Tap help and tap the item 225 Settings Menu RECORD SETTING Menu video SCENE SELECT Settings to suit the shooting condition can be selected Shooting According to Scene Subject p 32 Displayed only in the manual recording mode FOCUS Focus can be adjusted manually Adjusting Focus Manually 1 p 33 Displayed only in the manual recording mode BRIGHTNESS ADJUST Adjusts the overall brightness of the screen Adjusting Brightness t p 34 Displayed only in the manual recording mode BACKLIGHT COMP Corrects the image when the subject appears dark due to backlight Setting Backlight Compensation t p 35 Displayed only in the manual recording mode WHITE BALANCE Adjusts the color according to the light source Setting White Balance t p 36 Displayed only in the manual recording mode TELE MACRO Enables close up shots when using the telephoto T end of the zoom Taking Close up Shots t p 37 Displaye
25. To use this unit with a language that differs from the display language of the TV set HDMI CONTROL to OFP The display language of the TV will not switch automatically even if the display language of this unit is changed e These functions may not work correctly when devices such as amplifier and selector are connected Set HDMI CONTROL to OFF e f HDMI CEC does not work properly turn off and on this unit again Playback Connecting via the AV Connector To playback videos on TV connect the provided AV cable P N QAM1322 001 to the AV terminal of this unit e Refer also to the instruction manual of the TV in use e The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory I Connecttoa TV Video Input D Video Input Audio Input L Audio Input R Yellow AV Cable Provided QAM1322 001 Turn off the camcorder by pressing the 4 button for about 2 seconds 2 Connect the AC adapter to this unit AC Adapter oe To AC Outlet 110 V to 240 V The unit turns on automatically 3 Press the external input button on the TV to switch to the input from this unit via the connected connector 4 Play back a file SD use p ee gt lt PIEP pe EA a C m OT CW e Playing Back Videos t p 64 Playing Back Still Images t p 74 Memo e For questions about the TV or met
26. e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode e ALL SCENES video ALL IMAGES still image All videos or still images in this unit are copied UNSAVED SCENES video UNSAVED IMAGES still image Videos or still images that have never been copied are automatically selected and copied 5 Tap EXECUTE ALL SCENES REQUIRED DISC SPACE DVD 2 DVD DL 1 PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC e The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed Prepare the discs accordingly 6 Tap AUTO or BY DATE sii mode only Copying ALL SCENES CREATE HEADLINES ON THE TOP MENU SELECT THE SORT METHOD AUTO BY DATE e When AUTO is selected videos with similar recording dates are displayed in groups When BY DATE is selected videos are displayed according to recording dates 7 Tap EXECUTE ALL SCENES REMAINING DVD 02 DVD DL 1 EXECUTE STOP e When INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO EXIT appears change the disc 8 Tap OK when COMPLETED is displayed ALL SCENES COMPLETED 9 Press and hold the button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit and disconnect the USB cable Caution e Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is complete Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied Special files cannot
27. first yg SPECIAL RECORDING Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 60 Recording Checking the Remaining Recording Time You can check the remaining recording time on the built in memory and SD card as well as the remaining battery power Openthe LCD monitor Set the recording mode to either si video or still image To switch the mode between video and still image tap sii or A on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si or to switch the mode to video or still image respectively 2 Press the INFO button f in the still image mode go directly to step 4 3 Display the remaining recording time The remaining recording time is displayed only in the video recording mode e Press the INFO button to check the remaining recording time of each recording media To display the remaining battery power tap L_ e _ will not be displayed when the AC adapter is connected Tap to return to the recording mode e To exit the display tap X 4 Display the remaining battery power REMAINING BATTERY 100 50 0 MAX TIME 1 20 MIN For video recording tap to return to the remaining recording time display For still image recording tap to return to the recording mode e To exit the display press the INFO button or tap X Remaining battery power will not be displayed when the AC adapter is connected
28. simi a HPAUSE dm CE H p ae yigg Fause Barking Game Score W 4 Select the Still Image tab in the lower part of the screen and tap the index screen ANCHO iFrame Still Image e Tap Monitor to return to the monitor screen Tap amp to move to the setting screen 5 Enter the check in the checkbox Q to the still images to transfer and tap the transfer mark icon on the lower right Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 be 2 Tap Monitor to return to the monitor screen Tap amp to move to the setting screen 6 Tap TRANSFER YOU CAN TRANSFER VIDEOS OR STILL IMAGES TO THE SMARTPHONE TRANSFER CANCEL e Tap CANCEL to cancel the operation TRANSFER starts o 6 pm gt gt gt PREPARING TO TRANSFER 1 1 CANCEL Tap CANCEL to cancel the operation 8 After transferring is complete tap OK COMPLETED OK CHECK SHARE e To play back and check the still image tap CHECK Android only To upload the still image tap SHARE Android only Tap the desired service then proceed to the uploading process To make use of a service it is necessary to perform registration beforehand 185 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Smartphone Application Settings VID SIZE TO TRANS Select the resolution of the video being You can change the settings of t
29. 2 application 3 Tap on the Everio sync 2 application The detailed information of the application is displayed 4 Tap Install e For applications that access data or functions of this unit a screen that shows the data or functions that will be used is displayed 5 Confirm the content and tap Download e Downloading starts Deleting the Application 1 Tap Play store on the application list 2 Press the menu button and tap My apps e A list of previously downloaded applications is displayed 3 Tap on the Everio sync 2 application 4 Tap Uninstall then tap OK Memo The specifications of Google Play are subject to changes without prior notice For operating details refer to the help file of Google Play E iPhone iPad iPod touch I Tap App Store on the home screen 2 Search for the Everio sync 2 application 3 Tap on the Everio sync 2 application The detailed information of the application is displayed 4 Tap FREE Install e Enter your password on the password entry screen e Downloading starts The downloaded application will be added to the home screen automatically Deleting the Application 1 Press and hold the Everio sync 2 application on the home screen 2 Tap X to confirm the deletion Memo The specifications of App Store are subject to changes without prior notice For operating details ref
30. 226 SHUTTER MODE Continuous shooting settings can be adjusted RECORD ONE SHOT Records one still image CONTINUOUS SHOOTING Records still images continuously while the SNAPSHOT button is pressed 231 Settings Menu Memo e Some SD cards may not support continuous shooting e The continuous shooting speed will drop if this function is used repeatedly SMILE SHOT Automatically captures a still image upon detection of a smile Capturing Smiles Automatically SMILE SHOT amp p 45 SMILE NAME DISPLAY Displays the names and smile levels when faces are detected Setting SMILE NAME DISPLAY amp amp p 50 PET SHOT Automatically captures a still image upon detection of the face of a pet such as dogs or cats Capturing Pets Automatically PET SHOT p 46 IMAGE SIZE Sets the image size number of pixels for still images 3840X2160 8M Takes still images with aspect ratio 16 9 1920X1080 2M The sides of still images recorded in 16 9 aspect ratio may be cut off when printed 1440X1080 1 5M Takes still images with aspect ratio 4 3 640X480 0 3M 232 Settings Menu SPECIAL RECORDING Menu still image ie e AUTO REC Starts recording automatically by sensing the changes in subject s movement changes in brightness within the red frame displayed on the LCD monitor Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements AUTO REC t amp p 57 233
31. 4 Tap YES ALL SCENES IET Bee wei5 SCENES DELETE VOLUME 144MB FREE SPACE 1 677 000MB DELETE e After deleting tap OK Formatting the USB External Hard Disk Drive All files on the external hard disk drive can be deleted Caution e All data on the external hard disk drive will be deleted when it is formatted Copy all files on the external hard disk drive to a computer before formatting Select video or still image mode 2 Tap FORMAT ai VIDEO BACKUP FORMAT oo e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode Tap the vii icon to switch between the video and still image modes 3 Tap YES FORMAT DO YOU WANT TO FORMAT IF YES ALL DATA WILL BE ERASED e After formatting tap OK 177 Copying Copying Files to an SD Card GZ EX355 You can copy videos and still images from the built in memory to SD card Copying still images to cards makes it convenient to bring them to the shop for printing developing Caution e Make sure that there is enough space left in the destination medium e Videos in the SD card cannot be copied to the built in memory I Open the LCD monitor Tap sii or to select the video or still image mode 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode CN N 87 END The mode changes between recording and playback with every tap 3 Tap MENU
32. 7 TRANSFER starts Dhara ror PREPARING TO TRANSFER 1 1 CANCEL Tap CANCEL to cancel the operation 8 After transferring is complete tap OK COMPLETED OK CHECK SHARE e To play back and check the video tap CHECK Android only To upload the video tap SHARE Android only Tap the desired service then proceed to the uploading process To make use of a service it is necessary to perform registration beforehand 183 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Transferring Still Images You can transfer recorded still images to your smartphone If the aspect ratio of the original still image is 4 3 the image is reduced by 1600X1200 when transferred If the aspect ratio of the original still image is 16 9 the image is reduced by 1920X1080 when transferred Start Everio sync 2 on the smartphone e Start the application after confirming that the smartphone is connected to this camera 2 Select the connection type to the camera m e el mem DIRECT MONITORING b CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME SCORING FUNCTION INDOOR MONITORING r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT OUTDOOR MONITORING Tafi CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS Pa P T Demo Tap the current connection type e Recording screen appears 3 Tap Index 184
33. 7 Tap SEARCH Operation on this camera ADD SEARCH HL Rec menu e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon e The search results appear on the camera s screen 8 Tap the name SSID of the desired access point from the list of search results Operation on this camera 218 ya TOP MENU TA F H S 3 Tap VIDEO MAIL 4 Tap VIDEO MAIL ATTN VIDEO MAIL e To display the icon tap the e mail address To cancel the e mail address press the icon one more time e Up to 8 e mail addresses can be selected 6 Tap START mp VIDEO MAIL e Or tap the REC on screen 8 Recording starts after the 5 second countdown Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 e You can allow the recording to be performed for 15 seconds or press the START STOP button to stop 9 Tap SEND VIDEO MAIL SEND THIS VIDEO SEND STOP PLAY TO CHECK e Sending of the video mail starts To check the file tap PLAY TO CHECK When it is complete tap OK Check the incoming e mail 219 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 TV MONITORING Mi Setting Once setting is done start from the Regular Operation below Create a QR code E Enter values in the required items for the TV monitor e MAC address filter set to ON if monitoring images with a specific TV device e Add the MAC
34. CANCEL e Tap CANCEL to cancel the operation 8 After transferring is complete tap OK COMPLETED OK CHECK SHARE e To play back and check the video tap CHECK Android only To upload the video tap SHARE Android only Tap the desired service then proceed to the uploading process To make use of a service it is necessary to perform registration beforehand W Transferring manually You can set the length of transferred video 1 Tap MANUAL in step 5 2 At the start point enter the starting time of the video Specify the lengths of the video by using the slider bar 10 to 300 sec 3 After confirming the setting tap TRANSFER and then tap TRANSFER one more time aem m eee START POINT 00h10m za Start point of the video transfer 10 10 LENGTH OF VIDEO 60SEC Length of the trans ferred video TRANSFER e Tap to set the start point of the video transfer minutes seconds Length of the transferred video can be adjusted by using the slider bar The longer the length of the transferred video is set the longer it takes to transfer the video 187 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Transferring Videos iFrame format Transfer videos recorded in iFrame format to the smartphone Depending on the smartphone in use videos may not be played back Transferred videos are sent in the original file format Start Eve
35. Memo e You can change to the desired video quality by tapping on it from the remaining recording time display 67 Recording Approximate Video Recording Time Picture quality Built in memory GZ EX355 only 16GB iFrame 960x540 1h 10m sw fron feron naam non enaon enon anson o fron eron an fonon feron fenon fonon iFrame 1280x720 4h 8h GZ EX355 GZ EX310 iFrame 960x540 5m Om 1h10m 2h40m 3h50m 5h10m 10h 30m GZ EX355 GZ EX310 The actual recording time may shorten depending on the shooting environment Approximate Number of Still Images Unit Number of Shots Image size Built in memory GZ EX355 only SDHC SDXC card 3840X2160 8M 16 9 3000 800 1600 3200 6600 1920x1080 2M 16 9 9999 3100 6500 9999 9999 1440x1080 1 5M 4 3 9999 4200 8500 9999 9999 640x480 0 3M 9999 9999 9999 9999 9999 e Still images that are captured during video recording or video playback are saved at a size of 1920 x 1080 62 Recording Approximate Recording Time Using Battery E GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Battery Pack Actual recording time Continuous recording time Maximum Recording Time BN VG114U 1h5m 1h55m Supplied BN VG121U 1h40m 3h5m E GZ E300 Battery Pack Actual recording time Continuous recording time Maximum Recording Time BN VG107U 40m 1h5m Supplied BN VG114U 1h15m 2h10m BN VG121U 1h55m 3h15m BN VG138U 3h 20m 5h45m The above are values when LIGHT is set to OFF and
36. SETUP HL Rec menu ya TOP MENU Tap A or V to scroll the screen 4 Tap DST SETTING CLOCK ADJUST 5 Tap ON DST SETTING DAYLIGHT SAVING TIME DST CURRENT SETTING OFF Memo e What is daylight saving time Daylight saving time is the system of setting the clock 1 hour ahead for a fixed period in summer It is used mainly in the Western countries e Restore the daylight saving time settings after you returned from the trip e The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Getting Started Optional Accessories You can record for a longer time by using the optional battery pack Battery Pack Provides a longer recording time It can also be BN VG114U used as a spare battery pack BN VG121U BN VG138U Battery Charger Enables the battery pack to be charged without AA VG1 using this unit AA VF8 HDMI Mini Cable Allows viewing in high picture quality when e VX HD310 connected toa TV e VX HD315 Transmits video audio and control signals between devices Memo e The optional accessories above may not be supported in some regions e For more information refer to the catalog e For details on the provided accessories refer to Verifying the Accessories Verifying the Accessories t p 11 Approximate Recording Time Using Battery E GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Battery Pack Actual recording time Continuous recording time Maxi
37. TES INDOOR MONITORING r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT 6 Activate WPS on the smartphone or computer within 2 minutes NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS Operation on the smartphone or computer POINT To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 7 A connection is established and appears on the camera s screen OUTDOOR MONITORING Tal CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS Demo Operation Method Activate the GPS function of the smartphone Operation on the smartphone snapshot e For details on using the smartphone refer to the instruction manual of the device in use r 7 2 Start Everio sync 2 on the smartphone i T l l Wide Pause Barking Game Score m To change the time interval for obtaining the GPS location information OFF 15 sec tap Smartphone Application Settings p 186 5 Receiving the location information Display on this camera DIRECT MONITORING 3 Tap DIRECT MONITORING When the GPS location information is received from the smartphone an icon g is displayed on the camera screen 6 Start recording Operation on this camera 149 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 e Press the START STOP button to start a normal recording Memo e Manual recording cannot be performed t is not possible to switch to the playback mode 150 Using the Pan Cradle Sold Separately Panning ope
38. The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera HL Rec menu ya TOP MENU 2 we 3 Tap DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING Operation on this camera 4 Tap HTTP PORT Operation on this camera 5 Enter a port number Operation on this camera 155 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Setting the Enforced Group Owner DIRECT MONITORING Sets whether to enforce authorization of the group owner I Tap MENU Operation on this camera The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera iil Rec menu ya TOP MENU 3 Tap the DIRECT MONITORING sa icon in the Wi Fi menu Operation on this camera 4 Tap ENFORCED GROUP OWNER Operation on this camera DIRECT MONITORING 5 Tap ON or OFF ENFORCED GROUP OWNER OFF ON t is recommended to select ON usually If connection to devices that support Wi Fi Direct fails set to OFF Memo When set to OFF connection to devices that do not support Wi Fi Direct will be disabled Changing the HTTP Port DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING Changes the port number to access to the camera Valid when setting up multiple cameras for Outdoor Monitoring 156 I Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt PLAY The t
39. e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode Tap the vii icon to switch between the video and still image modes 3 Tap the media you would like to make a backup Q CREATE FROM ALL SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP 4 Tap the desired method ax BACK UP ALL SCENES UNSAVED SCENES ALL SCENES video ALL IMAGES still image All videos or still images in this unit are copied e UNSAVED SCENES video UNSAVED IMAGES still image Videos or still images that have never been copied are automatically selected and copied 5 Check thatthere is sufficient remaining space on the hard disk drive and tap YES ALL SCENES e TNTE 15 SCENES REQ SPACE 147MB FREE SPACE 1 007 768MB START TO BACKUP Backup starts when YES is tapped 109 Copying 6 Tap OK when COMPLETED is displayed Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive Videos or still images saved in an external hard disk drive can be played ALL SCENES back on this unit Tap PLAYBACk CI VIDEO BACKUP SAVED Press and hold the button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit and disconnect the USB cable Caution Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is 2 Select video or still image mode complete e Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied Spe
40. set according to the condition when the e mail account is obtained ISS See Bo e User name set if the SMTP authentication method is set to other than None Same as the registered user name account name when the e mail account is obtained SHES ASSN Password set if the SMTP authentication method is set to other than None Same as the registered password when the e mail account is obtained 6 Tap EXECUTE W Enter values in the required items for setting notification SET FROM QR CODE mails el Wi Fi SETTING CAN BE SET e Detection method set the detection method of when to start recording USING WEB USER GUIDE OR video for notification e mails SMART USER GUIDE e Detecting interval select the time period to enable detection again after the previous one Self recording specify whether to save the detected video on the camera EXECUTE STOP ON or not OFF Display the screen for reading the QR code Read a QR code l Tap MENU Operation on this camera Read a QR code Operation on this camera PLEASE READ QR CODE iil Rec 8 menu e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi X icon 2 Tap YES Operation on this camera Se Enea GA CODE ya TOP MENU CHANGE THE SETTING OF DETECT MAIL PREVIOUS SETTING WILL BE OVERWRITTEN e Contents of the screen vary depending on the QR code that is read by this unit 212 Using Wi Fi by Creating
41. 3 Start Internet Explorer web browser on the computer and enter the URL W rows Interret Lxp orer e OO emam Sidi l G D a 4 Login with your username and password e The username is everio and the default password is 0000 Changing the Settings t p 153 Operations from the Web browser Using the Wi Fi Function from a Web Browser t p 188 139 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Image Monitoring via the Internet OUTDOOR MONITORING You can check the image on the camera via internet connection with a smartphone or computer To use this function it is necessary to prepare for an UPnP Universal Plug and Play compatible wireless LAN router and an internet connection from which the global IP address can be obtained e Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring GBF C e Setting Multiple Cameras in the Same Network a To set up multiple cameras you need to fix the HTTP ports for each of the cameras Changing the HTTP Port DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING t p 155 What You Need e Smartphone or Windows computer e Wireless LAN router that supports UPnP use a product that has a Wi Fi certification logo To check whether UPnP is supported please refer to the instruction manual of the wireless LAN router in use Internet connection with an obtainable global IP address Global
42. 4 Tap EDIT 112 6 Tap onthe files to copy pam QUANTITY 0030 i 7 ay F d 3 re A v appears on the selected files To remove Y from a file tap on the file again e Tap SEL ALL to select all files Tap REL ALL to release all selections 7 Tap SET rink QUANTITY 0030 E PELL Ep E 4 Se BK m Sn iA lt ree a ie ps Pe uh ris e SET is deactivated when no file is selected 8 Tap YES COPY VIDEO COPY QUANTITY 30 START COPY e Copying starts e After copying tap OK Copying Moving Files to an SD Card GZ EX355 QUANTITY 0030 Fes AEE You can move videos and still images from the built in memory to SD card Files that are moved will be deleted from the built in memory Moving still images to SD cards makes it convenient to bring them to the shop for printing developing Gane F WW r ie Vis C Ci p Caution Make sure that there is enough space left in the destination medium N aom e Videos in the SD card cannot be moved to the built in memory v appears on the selected files To remove V from a file tap on the file again e Tap SEL ALL to select all files Tap REL ALL to release all selections 7 Tap SET Openthe LCD monitor pa QUANTITY 0030 EEE e Tap smi or to select the video or still image mode gt 3 E nGa PE AA es R i
43. 46 Capturing Pets Automatically PET SHOT PET SHOT automatically captures a still image upon detection of the face of a pet such as dogs or cats This function is available for both videos and still images The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Openthe LCD monitor Set the recording mode to either sii video or still image To switch the mode between video and still image tap sil or Cl on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si or to switch the mode to video or still image respectively You can also use the amp button on this unit 2 Tap MENU lt PLAY The top menu appears 3 Tap RECORD SETTING iil Rec menu Mai TOP MENU ra N a ey Re x 4 Tap gt onthe lower right of the screen ym RECORD SETTING pe ae 5 Tap PET SHOT e via RECORD SETTING Ps alk re Tap X to exit the menu e Tap to return to the previous screen Recording 6 Tap ON ym PET SHOT Tap X to exit the menu as the previous screen appears 7 Point the camera toward the pet e A still image is automatically captured when faces of pets are detected a i ae ge Coun WIL REC MENU e PHOTO lights up when a still image is being captured Memo The camera is able to detect up to 6 faces of pets e PET SHOT may not work properly depending
44. 7 O7 CS Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 6 Tap ON 45 Recording ya SMILE SHOT Tap X to exit the menu as the previous screen appears 7 Point the camera toward the human subject e A still image is automatically captured when smiles are detected e PHOTO lights up when a still image is being captured e You can display the name and smile level together with the frame by setting SMILE NAME DISPLAY in the menu to ON before recording Setting SMILE NAME DISPLAY p 50 Memo The camera is able to detect up to 16 faces Smile levels will be displayed for up to 3 of the largest faces displayed on the screen This function may not work properly depending on the shooting conditions distance angle brightness etc and the subject direction of face smile level etc It is also difficult to detect a smile in backlight e After a smile is detected and captured it takes time before the next recording may be performed e SMILE SHOT does not work in the following cases when menu is being displayed when remaining recording time or battery power is being displayed when any functions in SPECIAL RECORDING is set Caution e if TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF is not set to FACE TRACKING SMILE SHOT will not work e f appropriate results cannot be obtained record with SMILE SHOT set to OFP
45. By pressing the SNAPSHOT button 2 frames of still images are recorded and stop motion videos are created by piecing these images together Recording Stop Motion Videos STOP MOTION REC t amp p 56 AUTO REC Starts recording automatically by sensing the changes in subject s movement brightness within the red frame displayed on the LCD monitor Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements AUTO REC t p 57 ANIMATION EFFECT Records videos with animation effects Recording with Animation Effects ANIMATION EFFECT t p 39 DECORATE FACE EFFECT Detects faces and enables decorations such as crowns or sunglasses to be added Recording with Face Decorations DECORATE FACE EFFECT p 41 STAMP Records videos with various decorative stamps Recording with Decorative Stamps STAMP t p 42 HANDWRITING EFFECT Records videos with your personal handwriting or drawing If the writings and drawings appear to be misaligned correct the touch position Recording with Personal Handwriting HANDWRITING EFFECT t amp p 43 DATE TIME RECORDING You can record videos together with the date and time Set this when you want to save the file with date and time display The date and time cannot be deleted after recording Recording Videos with Date and Time t p 60 230 Settings Menu RECORD SETTING Menu still image SCENE SELECT Settings to suit the shooting con
46. DEVICE menu appears 4 Disconnect the USB cable and close the LCD monitor 4 Tap CONNECT TO PC Ay SELECT DEVICE SELECT DEVICE TYPE TO CONNECT 5 Tap PLAYBACK ON PC CI Mele ie3m rele PLAYBACK ON PC Tap X to exit the menu e Tap to return to the previous screen e Close the LoiLoFit for Everio program if it starts e The following screen is displayed after the camera operation is completed PLAYBACK ON PC e Operations are to be performed on the computer after the screen switches 119 Copying List of Files and Folders Folders and files are created in the SD card as shown below They are created only when necessary CJ J a Still Image Folder JVOCAM_ MEM DECIM 4 100JVCS0 PIC 0001 JPG Built In Memary 10i VES Pic ooo2 JPG a Sininage Fie 102UVG30 PIG_0003 JPG JVCCAM SD PIC_O004 MP4 Still image File SD Card AVCHD BDMV STREAM XXXXX_ MTS J Video Fila Built In Memory BACKUP CLIPINE PLAYLIST INDEX BDM MOVIEOBS BOM EXTMOV 7 DEM O000 MIS _ 4 Damo Widen Fila Moy 2002 MTS There may be no demo vided file PMOV O002 MTS MoV 0003 MTS Widhed files with detective manageme ni irka mation Management Inionmation SO Card PRIVATE AVCHD it NC Caution When the camera and PC are connected by an USB cable recorded media are read only 120 Copying Co
47. EX355 s amp p 242 Battery Indicator Checking the Remaining Recording Time t p 61 Playback Time Playing Back Videos t p 64 Time Lapse Playback Time Lapse Setting p 55 External Storage Playback Playing Back with a DVD Writer p 105 Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 98 Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive p 110 1080p Output HDMI OUTPUT p 241 SILENT MODE Using the Silent Mode t p 26 Scene Counter Indications on the LCD monitor Still Image Playback F F a Mi fa ef oe 1 2 3 4 56 W 100 0001 smmmmms 10 00 5D eo oo i pa F to hoa Still Image Mode Interior t p 245 Folder Number File Number Date Time e Displays the recording date and time Media REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE GZ EX355 t p 242 Battery Indicator Checking the Remaining Recording Time t p 61 SILENT MODE Using the Silent Mode t p 26 External Storage Playback Playing Back with a DVD Writer 1 p 105 Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 98 Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive t p 110 1080p Output HDMI OUTPUT t p 241 249 Troubleshooting When the unit is not working properly Turning Off the Power Close the LCD monitor 2
48. IP address is an IP address that is specific in all over the internet For more information contact your internet service provider Memo Depending on the wireless LAN router in use and signal strength you may experience connection problems or slow connections When the zoom or pan cradle is operated by using the smartphone or computer it may take longer for responses as compared to the manual operations Settings Required in Advance To operate it is necessary to connect the camera to the internet via an access point UPnP compatible wireless LAN router in the house As such the following 3 settings are required The above settings are not necessary if they have already been set for other functions 1 Registering an access point Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS c p 164 2 Obtaining a dynamic DNS account Obtaining a Dynamic DNS DDNS Account p 157 3 Setting the account on this camera Setting Dynamic DNS on this Camera OUTDOOR MONITORING c p 158 Caution Even if registration is done correctly to the camera access may be temporarily unavailable such as when the dynamic DNS server is down To check whether the dynamic DNS server is working properly access and check the DDNS server with a computer etc https dd3 jvckenwood com user 140 Operation Method WE Operation on this camera Memo Prior to use this function a smartp
49. MONITOR BRIGHTNESS is set to 3 standard GZ EX355 e The actual recording time is an estimate in case that such operations as zooming is used or recording is stopped repeatedly It may be shorter in the actual usage It is recommended to prepare battery packs ready for three times the expected recording time Recording time may differ depending on the shooting environment and usage When the battery life is reached the recording time becomes shorter even if the battery pack is fully charged Replace the battery pack with a new one 63 Playback Playing Back Videos The followings are the types of playback that can be performed by this unit Normal Plays back the recorded videos Playback Mark Playback The scenes marked while recording the video and the Mark playback scoring scenes recorded in the game recording mode game playback by using the smartphone application can be searched Also marked scenes and goal scenes can be extracted for playback extracted scenes can be saved as a playlist To start tap on the playback screen For the game recording mode refer to the game score settings GZ EX355 EX310 Game Score Settings t p 186 DIGEST From the recorded video scenes with a smile PLAYBACK detected scenes with a person whose face is registered and scenes that are marked manually are extracted and pieced together for a digest playback When AUTO is selected recorded
50. OUTPUT in the CONNECTION SETTINGS menu to the aspect ratio 4 3 or 16 9 of the connecting TV VIDEO OUTPUT t p 241 7 Start recording Start playback on this unit and press the record button on the recorder Playing Back Videos t p 64 e After playback is complete stop the recording 107 Copying Memo e AV cable P N QAM1322 001 Wiring specifications for video audio of the 4 pole mini plug are described in the following For purchasing consult your nearest JVC service center t Video yellow Grounding wire Audio Rch red Audio Lch white Memo e When there are many videos to dub you can create a playlist in advance and play it back so that all your favorite videos can be dubbed at once Creating Playlists with Selected Files t p 85 PLAYBACK PLAYLIST t amp p 72 To include the recording date and time during dubbing set DISPLAY DATE TIME in the PLAYBACK SETTING menu to ON Or set DISPLAY ON TV in the CONNECTION SETTINGS menu to ON 108 Using a USB External Hard Disk Drive You can copy video and still image files to a USB external hard disk drive from this unit You can also play the files in the USB external hard disk drive on this unit e Refer also to the instruction manual of the external hard disk drive Compatible External Hard Disk Drives You can use the LaCie Hard Disk Sl
51. Overseas cee eeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeanaaeeeeees 21 Charging the Battery Pack Overseas sscccsseeeeeeeeees 21 Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling 22 Setting Daylight Saving Time sccssnssscccenseacacersd asenddosvnnaeenniics 22 Optional ACCCSSONCS ecsisicsiiressirersri paersei nnen 23 Recording Taking Videos in Auto Mode ccccesseeeecessereeeneereneeaneres 24 Capturing Still Images During Video Recording 26 Taking Still Images in Auto Mode ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 27 ZOOMING ee E 30 Manual Recording sssssersrrsi eA a 30 Shooting According to Scene Subject cccseeeeeeeeeees 32 Adjusting Focus Manually secctencsncontarevewicn css nrtnnsescameaceuitonnss 33 Adjusting BRIQMINGS S cccssnccsccatetenstwennesesaiteedeateuarsninnatednentaarvies 34 Setting Backlight Compensation ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 35 Setting White Balance cccccceeceeeeceeesseeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeanaaes 36 Taking Close up Shots secaccccnsiaceininentoutnceseecantenntsGensderseneeeeds 37 Recording with Effects neoeeeseeeennnerernnnnnterrrnnnrerneen eneee 38 Recording with Animation Effects ANIMATION EFFECT 39 Recording with Face Decorations DECORATE FACE Sag 21h rere treet rere errr ert ete eee en mere 41 Recording with Decorative Stamps STAMP 0005 42 Recording with Personal Handwriting HANDWRITING EFFECT
52. Recording Recording Stop Motion Videos STOP MOTION REC By pressing the SNAPSHOT button 2 frames of still images are recorded and stop motion videos are created by piecing these images together Video files in AVCHD only The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions I Open the LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is i f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap vii to switch the mode to video You can also use the sifi IOl button on this unit 2 Tap MENU lt lt PLAY The top menu appears 3 Tap SPECIAL RECORDING ya TOP MENU HL Rec menu 4 Tap STOP MOTION REC SPECIAL RECORDING 56 5 Tap ON yay STOP MOTION REC e The STOP MOTION RECORDING MODE PRESS SNAPSHOT TO CAPTURE FRAME appears 6 Press the SNAPSHOT button to start recording Tap still image recording 3 to start recording Press the START STOP button or tap If to stop recording e CAPTURE lights up when a scene is recorded e Settings of the Stop Motion video are not saved when the power is turned off Caution e Audio cannot be recorded during STOP MOTION REC e This function does not support the iFrame recording format When recording is stopped with the recorded time less than 0 00 00 17 or less than 8 snapshots the video will not be saved e Simult
53. S Tap A or V to scroll the screen 20 Holding this Unit When holding this unit keep your elbows close to your sides to prevent camera shake e Hold the LCD monitor with your left hand and adjust the angle accordingly Holding the LCD monitor with your left hand helps to stabilize the camera for recording Caution e Be careful not to drop this unit during transportation e Guardians should pay close attention when this unit is being used by children Memo e f camera shake is excessive use the image stabilizer Reducing Camera Shake t p 52 Getting Started Tripod Mounting This unit can be mounted on a tripod or monopod This is useful for preventing camera shake and recording from the same position To prevent this unit from falling off check the tripod mounting screw holes and positioning holes on the unit carefully before mounting and turn the screws until they are fastened firmly Caution e To prevent injuries or damages which may result if this unit falls off read the instruction manual of the tripod or monopod to be used and make sure that it is securely attached Memo t is recommended to use a tripod or monopod when recording in conditions prone to camera shake such as in dark places or when zoomed to the telephoto end Set the image stabilizer to OFF when using a tripod for recording Reducing Camera Shake t p 52 Using this Unit Over
54. Selected Playlists p 102 6 Tap EXECUTE CREATE BY DATE REQUIRED DISC SPACE DVD 2 DVD DL 1 PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC CHECK e The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed 107 Copying Prepare the discs accordingly Tap CHECK to check the content 7 Tap AUTO or BY DATE mode only CREATE BY DATE CREATE HEADLINES ON THE TOP MENU SELECT THE SORT METHOD AUTO BY DATE e When AUTO is selected videos with similar recording dates are displayed in groups When BY DATE is selected videos are displayed according to recording dates 8 Tap EXECUTE CREATE BY DATE REMAINING DVD 02 DVD DL 1 EXECUTE STOP When INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO EXIT appears change the disc 9 Tap OK when COMPLETED is displayed CREATE BY DATE COMPLETED 10 Press and hold the button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit and disconnect the USB cable Caution e Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is complete Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied Special files cannot be copied either e All DVDs will be finalized automatically Files cannot be added to the DVD R DVD RW later Memo To check the created disc refer to Playing Back with a DVD Writer c p 105 Playing Back with a DVD Writer a
55. Settings Menu PLAYBACK SETTING Menu video SEARCH DATE Narrows down the video index screen according to recording dates Searching for a Specific Video Still Image by Date p 76 DISPLAY DATE TIME Sets whether to display the recording date and time during video playback Does not display the date and time during playback DIGEST PLAYBACK Plays back a digest of the recorded videos DIGEST PLAYBACK t p 70 PLAYBACK PLAYLIST Plays back the playlists that you have created PLAYBACK PLAYLIST t p 72 PLAYBACK OTHER FILE Plays videos with defective management information PLAYBACK OTHER FILE p 73 234 Settings Menu EDIT Menu video PROTECT CANCEL Protects files from being deleted accidently Protecting Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed File c p 81 Protecting Releasing Protection of Selected Files t p 82 COPY Copies files from the built in memory to the SD card Copying Files to an SD Card GZ EX355 t p 112 MOVE Moves files from the built in memory to the SD card Files that are moved will be deleted from the built in memory Moving Files to an SD Card GZ EX355 p 113 EDIT PLAYLIST A list in which your favorite videos are arranged is called a playlist By creating a playlist you can play back only your favorite videos in the order you like The original video file remains even when it is r
56. Tap ADD to insert a playlist O SELECT AND CREATE ee LEELLE E 0 999 7 e CHANGE REC MEDIA ee on faring TOTAL Blu ray DISC DVD AVCHD a ADD Cour j i i Repeat steps 6 7 and arrange the playlists The media changes to the tapped item Select the appropriate setting p p g play according to the disc e To change the position of a playlist lower row select the insertion Selecting Blu ray DISC enables you to save videos in a Blu ray disc point with lt gt after step 6 and tap ADD in the high definition quality appears when the inserted playlist is selected Selecting DVD AVCHD enables you to save videos in a DVD in the Tap 5 to deselect high definition quality e Tap on the selected playlist again to check the content of the playlist After checking tap 5 To delete of a video in the playlist lower row tap the video then tap amp SELECT AND CREATE CANCEL SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP 8 After arranging tap SAVE 4 Tap the media you would like to make a backup pi CREATE BY PLAYLIST 0 999 S A imag TOTAL DVD 01 00h00m DVD DL 1 6 ey BUILT IN MEMORY SD CARD 5 Tap CREATE BY PLAYLIST py SELECT AND CREATE CREATE BY DATE 9 Tap EXECUTE CREATE BY PLAYLIST CREATE BY PLAYLIST REQUIRED DISC SPACE DVD 2 DVD DL 1 PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC SELECT FROM SCENES CHECK The number of discs required to cop
57. Tap CANCEL to exit Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number e Tap lt or gt to move one space to the left or right The password is not required if the wireless LAN router is not security protected 10 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera REGISTERED aTa D iiaiai iioii ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 ACCESS POINTS 166 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 7 Tap MANUAL Operation on this camera ADD MANUAL 8 Enter the name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router and tap SEI Operation on this camera Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times e Tap DELETE to delete a character e Tap CANCEL to exit Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number e Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right 9 Select the type of authentication method security Operation on this camera TYPE OF SECURITY Select according to the setting of your router 10 When
58. Transmission speed may drop or connection may fail if the devices are placed too far away from each other when there are objects in between or when microwave ovens or other wireless devices are in use e f connection cannot be established again restart the terminal smartphone or computer e f the camera is too far away from the smartphone or computer connection for direct monitoring may be difficult to be established depending on the environment In this case connect via an access point wireless LAN router e S Unable to find an access point wireless LAN router Unable to connect to access point wireless LAN router Unsure of which access point wireless LAN router to use Unsure of password for the access point wireless LAN router Unable to connect via Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Check whether the distance from the access point wireless LAN router is too far or whether there are shielding materials in between e f the access point wireless LAN router in use goes into the SSID stealth mode perform manual registration or disable the stealth mode temporarily before registering In an environment with multiple access points you may not be able to find the desired access point through searching In this case add the access point manually Check that the password is correct For manual connection check that the SSID or authentication method is correct If the settings of the access point w
59. Unable to create disc with a BD writer external Blu ray drive Connect the USB cable correctly Preparing a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 91 BACK UP menu does not disappear While the USB cable is connected the BACK UP menu is displayed Unable to turn off the BACK UP menu Turn off the power of this unit and the DVD writer or remove the AC adapter Unable to delete folder in USB external hard disk drive Delete the folder using a computer When files are added or folders moved renamed with a computer they cannot be deleted on this unit 253 Troubleshooting Computer Unable to copy files to the computer s HDD If the provided software LoiLoFit for Everio is not installed some functions may not work properly Installing the Provided Software t p 115 Before making backup make sure that enough free space is left in the computer s hard disk HDD Unable to copy files to DVD or Blu ray disc with a PC To record to discs a recordable DVD or Blu ray drive is required for the computer in use Cannot upload the file to YouTube Check if you have created an account with YouTube You need a YouTube account to upload files to YouTube Changing videos to the file format for uploading cannot be performed on this unit Refer to the help file of the provided software LoiLoFit for Everio Refer to the help file of the provided software Everio MediaBrowser 4 am using a Mac com
60. W Avoid using this product near a TV or radio set TV or radio sets make use of a radio wave frequency bandwidth that is different from that of Wi Fi and therefore has no effect on communication by this product or the TV radio set However when a TV radio set is placed close to a Wi Fi product electromagnetic waves emitted by the Wi Fi product may cause noise to occur in the sound or images of the TV radio e Communication may not be carried out properly near radio equipment or broadcasting stations In this case change the location accordingly WE Radio signals are unable to penetrate through reinforced steel metal or concrete The radio waves used by this product are unable to penetrate through reinforced steel metal or concrete materials It may difficult for communication to be established if two rooms or floors are separated by these materials Communication may also get weaker when there are human subjects or parts of the body in between the Wi Fi devices E Do not connect to wireless networks that you do not have authorization for Once connected it may be considered as unauthorized access and legal actions can be taken against you 137 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 WE Do not use the Wi Fi function outside the country of purchase Depending on the country there may be restrictions on the use of radio waves and any violations could be punishable by law Exporting Bringing the Unit Overseas Permissio
61. WHER USING DIRECT MONITORING ndings rh eT ArItOr Ea VIDEO TRANSFER AVCHD Index e TPPAUSE IH LENGTH RESOLUTION pixel GAME SCORE GAME SCORE SETTING a a ee ee z S al MONITORING Turns on off the monitoring function of the l screen Enter a check mark to set to ON ale tec anapshai PAN SPEED FOR Select the panning speed of the pan cradle OPERATING optional from high speed low speed LOC INFO TRANS INT Select the time interval for obtaining the GPS Wide Pause location information while the direct monitoring is in use Off 15 SEC Biiviarking Game Score W VID LENGTH TO Set the length of video being transferred to the TRANS smartphone 10 300SEC 2 Tap GAME SCORE SETTING Available for videos in AVCHD format only 186 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 MONITOR CHANGE Set the background color of the game score screen BACKGROUND MONITORING L COLOR DISPLAY THE MONITOR SCREEN PRIORITIZE The score can be entered within 5 seconds after the THE SCORE mark operation by selecting the checkbox However the marked position is changed when the score is registered LOC INFO TRANS INT GPS SENDS LOCATION INFORMATION 155EC i TO THE CAMERA WHEN USING DIRECT Memo MONITORING When registering the team name the mark being entered by the VIDEO TRANSFER AVCHD Index smartphone is displayed as backslash on this camera LENGTH RESOLUTION pixel GAME SC
62. Wait for a while until natural colors are achieved It may take some time for white balance to be adjusted Set WHITE BALANCE in the recording menu to MANUAL Select from FINE CLOUD HALOGEN MARINE BLUE MARINE GREEN according to the light source Select MWB and adjust accordingly Set WHITE BALANCE in the recording menu to MANUAL Select from FINE CLOUD HALOGEN according to the light source Select MWB and adjust accordingly Setting White Balance t p 36 The color looks different Set WHITE BALANCE in the recording menu accordingly Setting White Balance t p 36 There are bright or dark spots on the screen While the LCD monitor screen has more than 99 99 effective pixels 0 01 of the pixels may be bright spots red blue green or dark spots This is not a malfunction The spots will not be recorded Troubleshooting Other Problems The buttons on the touch screen do not work Tap the buttons on the touch screen with your fingers or the stylus pen The buttons may not respond if you touch them with your fingernails or with gloves on Save the recorded data before requesting service Connect to computer using a USB cable The SELECT DEVICE menu appears 2 Press and hold the START STOP button for more than 2 seconds The PLAYBACK ON PC appears Operations are to be performed on the computer afte
63. a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 3 Tap OK SET FROM QR CODE SETTINGS COMPLETED Step 2 is displayed e Set contents are saved Registering the access points wireless LAN router to this unit E Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Registration I Tap MENU Operation on this camera PLAY L menu The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera oe a oe nua 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera Wi Fi os Sx Wi Fi 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS vo 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera ACCESS POINTS 7 Tap EZ REGISTRATION WPS Operation on this camera 8 Activate WPS of the access point wireless LAN router within 2 minutes e To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 9 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera REGISTERED ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 WE Search the access point and select from the list Set the name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router and the password beforehand I Tap MENU Operation on this camera C lt PLAY il menu The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Oper
64. adapter and battery pack from this unit 7 Copy the files to any folder in the computer desktop etc Caution When the folders or files are deleted moved renamed in the computer they cannot be played back on this unit anymore Memo To edit view the files use a software that supports AVCHD video JPEG still image files The above operations on computer may vary with the system used 3 Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter AC Adapter To AC Outlet 110 V to 240 V Disconnecting this Unit from Computer To DC Connector 2 Click Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media To USB USB Cable To USB Connector Provided Connector 1 1 Connect using the provided USB cable 2 Connect the AC adapter to this unit e This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter 3 The SELECT DEVICE menu appears 2 Click Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device 4 Tap CONNECT TO PC 3 Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media For Windows Vista Click OK Ay SELECT DEVICE 4 Disconnect the USB cable and close the LCD monitor SELECT DEVICE TYPE TO CONNECT 5 Tap PLAYBACK ON PC CI Mele ie3m rele PLAYBACK ON PC Tap X to exit the menu e Tap to return to the previous screen e Close the Everio MediaBrowser 4 program if it starts e The following screen is displayed afte
65. address register the physical address when monitoring images with a specific TV device Up to 8 addresses can be registered Display the screen for reading the QR code l Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt PLAY e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera HL Rec MENU 3 Tap gt onthe lower right of the screen Operation on this camera Wi Fi ge PNG ee j A nua 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 5 Tap SET FROM QR CODE 220 COMMON Wi Fi SETTING 6 Tap EXECUTE SET FROM QR CODE Wi Fi SETTING CAN BE SET USING WEB USER GUIDE OR SMART USER GUIDE EXECUTE STOP Read a QR code Read a QR code Operation on this camera PLEASE READ QR CODE 2 Tap YES SET FROM QR CODE REGISTER THE MAC ADDRESS UNABLE TO REGISTER IF 8 ADDRESSES HAVE ALREADY BEEN REGISTERED 3 Tap OK SET FROM QR CODE SETTINGS COMPLETED e Step 2 is displayed Set contents are saved Registering the access points wireless LAN router to this unit WE Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Registration Tap MENU Operation on this camera Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 AD EZ REGISTRATION WPS Activate WPS of the access point wireless LAN router within 2 minutes To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in
66. and or marked scene that is recorded by the smartphone application Everiwo sync 2 e To start tap on the playback screen e For the game recording mode refer to Game Score Settings p 186 The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions and built in memory I Open the LCD monitor f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap vii to switch the mode to video You can also use the sili IOl button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode CN O MCE 87 ena 3 Tap to open the mark playback mode i MARKING PLAYBACK IET bn Tap the list of the game to playback all the scenes of the game Tap DIGEST to extract the score and marked scenes from the game and to start a DIGEST playback 6 Marked scenes are played back automatically 68 gt 22s See CERCA 0 01 23 E3 co e Playback stops after all the scenes are played back e Tap DIGESTX during DIGEST playback to exit the Mark DIGEST playback and to switch to the normal mark playback Indications during the Game Playback E During the Normal Game Playback gt SSS Ss HOME 1 1 VISITOR eg GAME mamn A 0 01 23 QB M Mark Delete button Deletes the mark that is currently displayed Playback Mark Enter a mark while playback is in progress Button Recorded time Displays the time that the video is reco
67. authentication method is not set to NON E enter a password and tap SET Operation on this camera PASSWORD EA A TE TE ae no TUV WXYZ CANCEL Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times Tap DELETE to delete a character e Tap CANCEL to exit e Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap or gt to move one space to the left or right 1 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera REGISTERED ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 167 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 E WPS PIN Registration I Tap MENU Operation on this camera CN REC ST MENU The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera yay TOP MENU 3 Tap gt onthe lower right of the screen Operation on this camera 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera ACCESS POINTS 168 7 Tap WPS PIN Operation on this camera e The PIN code appears 8 Enter the PIN code displayed on the camera to
68. be copied either e All DVDs will be finalized automatically Files cannot be added to the DVD R DVD RW later Memo To check the created disc refer to Playing Back with a DVD Writer c p 105 Playing Back with a DVD Writer p 105 Copying Files by Date Videos or still images are sorted and copied according to the date on which they were recorded The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Select video or still image mode 2 Tap SELECT AND CREATE video or SELECT AND SAVE still image wd VIDEO BACKUP CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE PLAYBACK e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode Tap vi to switch between the video and still image modes 3 Tap the media you would like to make a backup amp SELECT AND CREATE SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP 4 Tap CREATE BY DATE video or SAVE BY DATE still image yg SELECT AND CREATE CREATE BY DATE CREATE BY PLAYLIST SELECT FROM SCENES e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode 5 Tap to select a recording date Wat CREATE BY DATE e You cannot select more than one recording date for copying Tocopy files from multiple recording dates itis recommended to copy by creating a playlist Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos t p 85 Copying
69. by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 SET FROM QR CODE COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS SETTINGS COMPLETED q e Set contents are saved Operation on this camera lt ACCESS POINTS Registering the access points wireless LAN router to this unit Mi Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Registration Tap MENU Operation on this camera 7 Tap EZ REGISTRATION WPS Operation on this camera HL Rec menu The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera 8 Activate WPS of the access point wireless LAN router within 2 minutes e To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 9 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera REGISTERED ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera Wi Fi WE Search the access point and select from the list A Ge Set the name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router and the password beforehand nm l Tap MENU Operation on this camera 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera C lt PLAY il menu The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera Operation on this camera 217 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 S Beane SEAR
70. can use a commercially available anti reflection or protective film on the screen However depending on the thickness of the film operations on the touch screen may not be performed smoothly or the screen may darken slightly 258 Specifications Camera Connectors Power supply Using AC adapter DC 5 2 V Using battery pack DC 3 6 V GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Using battery pack DC 3 5 V 3 6 V GZ E300 HDMI output HDMI mini connector connector AV output Video output 1 0 V p p 75 Q connector Audio output 300 mV rms 1 KQ GZ E300 Mini USB Type AB USB 2 0 compliant 2 2 W MONITOR BRIGHTNESS 3 standard Rated Current Consumption 1A Video AVCHD Dimensions mm 50 x 57 x 116 2 x 2 1 4 x 4 5 8 W x H x D excluding grip belt Power consumption GZ EX355 GZ EX310 2 3 W MONITOR BRIGHTNESS 3 standard Recording AVCHD standard Playback format Video MPEG 4 AVC H 264 Audio Dolby Digital 2ch Signal system NTSC standard Image quality UXP Video 1920 x 1080 pixels Average Approximate 24 Mbps XP 1920 x 1080 pixels Mass GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Approx 200 g 0 44 Ibs camera only Approx 240 g 0 53 Ibs including supplied battery pack GZ E300 Approx 195 g 0 43 Ibs camera only Approx 225 g 0 5 Ibs including supplied battery pack Operating Allowable operating temperature 0 C to 40 C environment 32 F to 104 F Allowable storage temperature 20 C to 50 C 4 F
71. ccccceseeecceeseeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeesaaeeees 131 RECORD SETTING Menu still image ccccseseeeeeeeees 231 Precautions on Using Wi Fi vassarecespessiennndacsdbasaindennsesemmemeonate 131 SPECIAL RECORDING Menu still image ee 233 Image Monitoring via Direct Connection DIRECT PLAYBACK SETTING Menu video ccccseseeeeeeeeeeeees 234 MONITORING ose snccerecanedeesumcec aonmoensonaget necidonscedeeseanstesncees 132 EDIT Menu VIC Oct vassteeenct eenetasencconecieesscbseasseanceseeseeeseek 235 Image Monitoring via an Access Point at Home INDOOR PLAYBACK SETTING Menu still image ccceeees 236 MONITORING ocstecec ecg ttctoaaceeeeemsreweniegeiseraeeiunateostveacotseets 135 EDIT Menu still image es eeeeeeeseeieeeeeeerererererrersrerereeren 237 Image Monitoring via the Internet OUTDOOR MONITORING SETUP video still image ccecesseeceeesseseesesseseeeeeeereee 238 Ss pasta estate A EN Ses rien ite EA A EA ee es E E bene 140 CONNECTION SETTINGS video still image 241 Sending Still Images via E mail upon Detection of Face or MEDIA SETTINGS video Still image ccececesceeseeeeeeeeseees 242 OEE TE T A sete ieee eee aser log USB CONNECTION MENU cccsssssssssssesssssesseeeeeeeeessnnnnenee 243 Record and Send Videos via E mail VIDEO MAIL 144 Image Monitoring on TV TV MONITORING s a a 145 EASY STORAGE ssescssssssssesssssssssesssssssse
72. connecting to a VCR For purchasing consult your nearest JVC service center u u l quality by g e Refer also to the instruction manuals of the TV and VCR Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit ft 2 ioe Video yellow Open the LCD monitor Grounding wire 4 Audio Rch red Audio Lch white Memo e When there are many videos to dub you can create a playlist in advance and play it back so that all your favorite videos can be dubbed at once Creating Playlists with Selected Files p 85 PLAYBACK PLAYLIST amp p 72 To include the recording date and time during dubbing set DISPLAY OE 1 Yellow f Video Input DATE TIME in the PLAYBACK SETTING menu to ON Or set S Video Input DISPLAY ON TV in the CONNECTION SETTINGS menu to ON 3 Connect to a VCR DVD recorder White S Audio Input L AV Cable Provided ed 3 Audio Input R Outlet VCR DVD Recorder t 2 aT To DC Connector 1 Connect using the provided AV cable 2 Connect the AC adapter to this unit e This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter 4 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode uN REC OS ea 5 Prepare the TV VCR for recording e Switch to a compatible external input e Insert a video tape 6 Prepare this unit for playback Set VIDEO
73. display the mode switching screen Tap vii to switch the mode to video You can also use the 8 0 button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode lt PLAY Ii Rec menu 3 Tap to open the mark playback mode 4 Tap SETTINGS vf MARKING PLAYBACK es _ amp DREIE ae z congress lt a lA wa ei DIGEST 5 Select the items for setting SETTINGS P B TIME PER SCENE 20 P B POSITION ADJUST Proceed to Step 6 if P B TIME PER SCENE is selected and proceed to Step 7 if P B POSITION ADJUST is selected 69 Playback 6 Select the playback time per scene DIGEST PLAYBACK You can play back a digest of the recorded videos Digest Playback eee re This is useful for checking the content of the videos quickly dee 10SEC The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory 20 20SEC I Open the LCD monitor Tap to return to the previous screen 7 Adjust the playback position P B POSITION ADJUST e Check if the recording mode is pia e f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si to switch the mode to video You can also use the W O button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode e Shift the playback position back and forth Playback time that is set in step 6 is unchanged e Adjust by using lt or gt then tap SET
74. drive 2 Click Disk to select the disc type Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media 9 31PM 1u g27 2010 Cer vey Mi aair ei 2 Click Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device 3 For Windows Vista Click OK 4 Disconnect the USB cable and close the LCD monitor 3 Select the date that the desired videos for saving on the disc was recorded 4 Select the files to save 5 Click Next henh imi eel 0 ie 2 altel Tr Caer Meets Ika 117 Copying 6 Sort the files in your desired order 8 After copying click Cancel DISK Crcation successful Would you like lo creale anolhes disk will Ihe same contents Ci e Click Cancel to end creating the disc 178 Memo The following types of discs can be used on the provided software LoiLoFit for Everio DVD R DVD R DL DVD RW in order to record on the Blu ray disc it is necessary to upgrade to the paid version of LoiLoFit for Everio For details refer to the following link http loilo tv jp product 33 page 27 e Videos recorded in the iFrame format can not be copied Depending on the PC environment even if the operating environment is adequate 1 frame per second may be reduced during video playback To view the help file of LoiLoFit for Everio select Help from the LoiLoFit for Everio s menu bar or press F1 on the keyboard e f you are unable to a
75. e Even when monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera will be fixed if not operated for more than 3 hours Focus works again when the camera is operated 142 Sending Still Images via E mail upon Detection of Face or Movement DETECT MAIL A still image is automatically captured and sent via e mail when faces or movements are detected by the camera Dx e Size of the still images shot by DETECT MAIL is 640 x 360 e Operation via connection to a smartphone or computer using INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING may be performed even during detection standby When the camera is connected to a smartphone or computer DETECT MAIL SETTING will be temporarily unavailable e You can set to record videos on this unit automatically during detection Recording on this unit p 153 e To prevent too many e mails from being sent in case of detections occurring frequently you can set the interval of e mail delivery Setting detection interval t p 153 What You Need e Wireless LAN router use a product that has a Wi Fi certification logo internet connection e Account for sending e mails Supports SMTP E mail services that is only accessible from the web cannot be used Settings Required in Advance To send e mails the following settings are required in advance The above settings are not necessary if they have already been set for other functions
76. files from this unit If there are many recorded files on this unit it takes time for the unit to respond This unit does not function properly and error messages appear This unit is a microcomputer controlled device Electrostatic discharge external noise and interference froma TV a radio etc might prevent it from functioning properly In such a case turn off the power then remove the AC adapter and battery pack This unit will be reset Operation disabled since the POWER CHARGE lamp and the ACCESS lamp are blinking After closing the LCD monitor remove power source battery and AC adapter Then attach the battery and AC adapter again and turn on the power by opening the LCD monitor If these operations won t solve the problem contact your JVC dealer or the JVC service center Disclaimer We shall not be held responsible for loss of recorded contents when recording videos audio or playback cannot be operated due to malfunctions in this unit provided parts or SD card Once deleted recorded contents data including data loss due to malfunctions in this unit cannot be restored Please be forewarned JVC will not be responsible for any lost data Please be forewarned In order for quality improvement defective recording medium is subject to be analyzed Therefore it may not be returned 255 Troubleshooting Error Message CHECK LENS COVER Open the lens cover SET DATE TIME Connect the AC a
77. i Or Select the Manual recording mode ON ADVANCE e ADVANCE is designed to perform more effective backlight compensation Choose this when the backlight compensation is not adjusted appropriately by ON lt lt PLAY ii MENU After setting the tele macro icon 4 appears If the mode is A Intelligent Auto tap A on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap M to switch the recording mode to Manual Backlight compensation is disabled Backlight compensation is enabled ADVANCE Should be selected for a better backlight compensation effect C lt PLAY Ii Rec menu The top menu appears 3 Tap RECORD SETTING yay TOP MENU 4 Tap WHITE BALANCE Oh Ge e Tap X to exit the menu e Tap to return to the previous screen 36 Recording 5 Tap the appropriate shooting environment Taking Close up Shots You can take close up shots of an object using the tele macro function The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions e Select the item by using lt or gt then tap SET Tap the icon directly to select The image is only an impression e The White Balance icon appears on the screen upon completing the i Select the Manual recording mode setting Adjusts automatically to the natural colors MWB Use this when the problem of unnatural colors is not resolved FINE Set this when shooti
78. of smiling face and proceed to enter a name tap STOP then tap NO and go to step 11 11 Tap Ok Le RECORDING COMPLETED ENTER A NAME e Tapping OK registers the recorded face and the screen for entering a name appears e To cancel the registration tap STOP When CANCEL FACE RECOGNITION appears tap YES to return to the normal recording mode 12 Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter a name then tap REG e Tap DELETE to delete a character Tap CANCEL to exit e Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number e Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right Up to 8 characters can be entered How to input characters Example To enter KEN Tap JKL 2 times Tap DEF 2 times Tap MNO 2 times 13 Tap the desired priority level then tap REG TOUCH ORDER TO RECOGNIZE Ar t 3 CH KEN e Upon registration the last number is assigned as the priority level During face detection the subject with the highest priority lowest number will be detected You can change the priority level of a subject by tapping on the number Example To change the priority level of number 3 to number 1 tap number 1 The priority level of the registered subject becomes number 1 while the priority levels of the original number 1 and the ones below drop by one place I
79. p 80 Playback Media Button GZ EX355 e Switches between SD card and built in memory Menu Button Operating the Menu p 224 Page Forward Back Button Operation Buttons for Video Playback t p 64 Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback t p 74 17 Getting Started Menu screen recording mode ps 9 The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Wi Fi menu Wi Fi Capabilities p 130 Shortcut Menu Operating the Shortcut Menu t p 225 SETUP Menu SETUP video still image p 238 Help Button Tap the help button and item to display descriptions MEDIA SETTINGS video still image t p 242 CONNECTION SETTINGS Menu CONNECTION SETTINGS video still image p 241 Close Button Exit the menu MEDIA SETTINGS Menu MEDIA SETTINGS video still image p 242 SPECIAL RECORDING Menu SPECIAL RECORDING Menu video c p 230 RECORD SETTING Menu RECORD SETTING Menu video t p 226 Menu screen playback mode 18 PLAYBACK SETTING Menu PLAYBACK SETTING Menu video gt p 234 PLAYBACK SETTING Menu still image p 236 CONNECTION SETTINGS Menu CONNECTION SETTINGS video still image gt p 241 Help Button Tap the help button and item to display descriptions MEDIA SETTINGS Menu MEDIA SETTINGS video still image p 242 Close
80. playable only on AVCHD compatible devices Memo To check the created disc refer to Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 98 Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 98 97 Copying Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive You can play back the Blu ray discs created on this unit Connect this unit to the BD write and TV If this unit is not connected to a TV images can be played back on the LCD monitor of this unit USB Cable 1 L HDMI Mini SS Cable Preparing a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 91 Connecting to and Viewing on TV t p 77 Insert a disc to play back into the BD writer 2 Tap PLAYBACK in the BACK UP menu cl VIDEO BACKUP CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE PLAYBACK e An index screen thumbnail display of the videos in the disc appears 3 Tap on the file to start playback PLAYBACK For details on video playback refer to Operation Buttons for Video Playback p 64 Operation Buttons for Video Playback t p 64 e To exit stop playback and turn off the camcorder by pressing the button for about 2 seconds Then disconnect the USB cable Memo e To play back the recorded image on TV connect this unit via the HDMI mini cable or the AV cord while this unit is connected to the BD writer external Blu ray drives Connecting via
81. the LOC INFO TRANS INT for the smartphone application is necessary Smartphone Application Settings p 186 e Activate the GPS function of the smartphone in advance The recorded location information can be used on the software provided with this unit What You Need Smartphone Settings Required in Advance Set up your camera and smartphone by performing the following operations For a smartphone with WPS support refer to the Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS WPS is a method to connect the camera and the smartphone wirelessly by easy button operations Mi Connection by entering the Wi Fi password l Tap MENU Operation on this camera Set the camera to the recording mode The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera HL Rec MENU ya TOP MENU TA Q 3 Tap the DIRECT MONITORING isa icon in the Wi Fi menu Operation on this camera 147 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Wi Fi aie mn ee La PD a 4 Tap START gt E Connection by Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Operation on this camera l Tap MENU DIRECT MONITORING Operation on this camera Set the camera to the recording mode When iFrame is selected for VIDEO REC FORMAT the following display appears and recording mode is switched to the 60i mode in lt lt PLAY i MENU AVCHD The top menu appears DI
82. the DVD writer or BD writer external Blu ray drive INSERT DISC Open the tray of the DVD writer or BD writer external Blu ray drive check and reset the DVD or Blu ray disc then close the tray Replace the disc in the DVD writer or BD writer external Blu ray drive CHANGE DISC Open the tray of the DVD writer or BD writer external Blu ray drive check and reset the DVD or Blu ray disc then close the tray Replace the disc in the DVD writer or BD writer external Blu ray drive 257 Maintenance Perform regular maintenance of this unit to enable it to be used for a long time Caution e Be sure to detach the battery pack AC adapter and power plug before performing any maintenance Camcorder e Wipe this unit with a dry soft cloth to remove any dirt When it is extremely dirty soak the cloth in a solution of neutral detergent wipe the body with it and then use a clean cloth to remove the detergent Caution e Do not use solvents such as benzene thinner or alcohol Doing so may cause damage to the unit When using a chemical cloth or cleaner be sure to observe the warning labels and instructions of the product e Do not leave the device in contact with rubber or plastic products for along time Lens LCD Monitor e Use a lens blower commercially available to remove any dust and a cleaning cloth commercially available to wipe off any dirt Mold may form if the lens is left dirty e You
83. the access point wireless LAN router For details on how to enter the PIN code refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 9 Tap START Operation on this camera WPS PIN PIN ererrsss ENTER THIS NUMBER TO ACCESS POINT THEN TOUCH START START QUIT e Tap START after entering PIN code to the wireless LAN router Connection cannot be established if START is tapped before entering the code 10 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera REGISTERED ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Editing LAN Settings of Access Points Wireless LAN Router USE Change accordingly such as when you want to fix the IP address for the camera DELETE I Tap MENU LAN SETTINGS Operation on this camera e Tap USE to use the selected access point Tap DELETE to delete the registered access point 7 Perform the LAN settings when DHCP is set to OFF Operation on this camera LAN SETTINGS CN REC ST MENU DHCP OFF The top menu appears IP ADDRESS 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Iv Operation on this camera SUBNET MASK ya TOP MENU mB gt e After setting tap OK e LAN settings comprise of the following items ON Obtains IP address from the DHCP server automatically OFF Settings of IP ADDRESS SUBNET MASK DEFAULT
84. the instruction manual of the TV in use e The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Connect toa TV rls To HDMI Mini Connector TV HDMI Connector Input Turn off the camcorder by pressing the 4 button for about 2 seconds 2 Connect the AC adapter to this an p D AC Adapter To AC Outlet 110 V to 240 V The unit turns on automatically 3 Press the external input button on the TV to switch to the input from this unit via the connected connector 4 Play back a file me OE Playing Back Videos p 64 Playing Back Still Images p 74 77 Playback Memo e Change the settings in HDMI OUTPUT according to the connection HDMI OUTPUT t p 241 When connected to the TV via the HDMI mini cable images and sounds may not be output properly depending on the TV connected In such cases perform the following operations 1 Disconnect the HDMI mini cable and connect it again 2 Turn off and on this unit again e For questions about the TV or method of connection contact your TV s manufacturer 78 Operating in Conjunction with TV via HDMI Connecting this unit to an HDMI CEC enabled TV using the HDMI mini cable allows linked operations with the TV to be performed e HDMI CEC Consumer Electronics Control is an industry standard that enables interoperability between HDMI CEC compliant devices that are connected via HDMI cabl
85. the setting of TOUCH PRIORITY AE I Open the lens cover AF By default it is set to FACE TRACKING Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF a p 44 Time Displays the current time Clock Setting amp p 18 Image Stabilizer Displays the image stabilizer setting Check if the recording mode is pia Reducing Camera Shake t p 52 f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap to switch the mode to video Recording Media 3 Check if the recording mode is A Intelligent Auto a A i D Displays the icon of the media where videos are recorded to The recording media can be changed GZ EX355 only REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO GZ EX355 t p 242 REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE GZ EX355 p 242 Battery Indicator Displays the approximate remaining battery power during use Checking the Remaining Recording Time r p 61 C lt PLAY li MENU f the mode is M Manual tap M on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Setting Scenes of Intelligent Auto Displays scenes detected automatically in the Intelligent Auto function Multiple scenes may be detected M Recording Mode Displays the current recording mode of Y Intelligent Auto or M Manual Tap A to switch the recording mode to Intelligent Auto i Remaining Recording Time SEAML
86. to 122 F Average Approximate 17 Mbps Allowable relative humidity 35 to 80 SP 1920 x 1080 pixels Image pickup 1 5 8 2 510 000 pixels CMOS back illuminated Average Approximate 12 Mbps device EP 1920 x 1080 pixels Average Approximate 4 8 Mbps SSW 16 9 720 x 480 pixels Interlaced Average Approximate 6 2 Mbps SEW 16 9 720 x 480 pixels Interlaced Recording area AVCHD mode Video 1 010 000 to 2 290 000 pixels image stabilizer off dynamic zoom ON iFrame mode 920 000 to 1 770 000 pixels dynamic zoom ON Recording area 1 710 000 pixels 4 3 image stabilizer OFF Still image 2 290 000 pixels 16 9 image stabilizer OFF Average Approximate 3 Mbps Lens F1 8 6 3 f 2 9 mm to 116 0 mm Video Sound quality 48 kHz 256 kbps Audio AVCHD mode 35 mm conversion 40 5 mm to 2 430 mm dynamic Videos iFrame GZ EX355 GZ EX31 0 zoom ON 35 mm conversion 40 5 mm to 1 620 mm dynamic zoom OFF iFrame mode 35mm conversion 46 0 mm to 2 530 mm dynamic zoom ON 35 mm conversion 46 0 mm to 1 840 mm dynamic zoom OFF Still Image 35 mm conversion 49 5 mm to 1 980 mm 4 3 35 mm conversion 40 5 mm to 1 620 mm 16 9 Recording MP4 standard Playback format Video MPEG 4 AVC H 264 Audio AAC 2ch eem pe Signal system NTSC standard Lowest illumination 3 lux Image quality 1280x720 1 lux SCENE SELECT NIGHTALIVE Video 1280 x 720 pixels Max 36 Mbps average approx 34 Mbps 96
87. to delete a character e Tap CANCEL to exit Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap lt or to move one space to the left or right e After setting tap SET 6 Tap SET Operation on this camera Settings will not be saved until SET is tapped Enabling the MAC Address Filter TV MONITORING By enabling MAC ADDRESS FILTER Everio can be searched from the device TV monitor the MAC address of the device needs to be registered to Everio in advance Tap MENU Operation on this camera CN REC ST MENU The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU TA Ze 3 Tap TV MONITORING 4 Tap MAC ADDRESS FILTER 5 Select ON or OFF Memo e f MAC ADDRESS FILTER is enabled while no MAC address is registered Everio can not be searched from all the devices Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Registering the MAC Address TV MONITORING Checking the MAC Address of this Camera Register the MAC address of the TV monitor to Everio Displays the MAC address of the camera I Tap MENU I Tap MENU Operation on this camera Operation on this camera PLAY Hi Rec Menu lt Hi Rec _ menu The top menu appears The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon 2 Tap the
88. use CN REC RT MENU The top menu appears 8 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera 9 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen ya TOP MENU Operation on this camera REGISTERED D aida alata aldol altel aiahahda lube iiniolalalais ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera Mi Search the access point and select from the list Wi Fi Set the name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router and the password beforehand l Tap MENU Operation on this camera Li G Fa a 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera PLAY il Menu The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi X icon Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera Wi Fi 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera ACCESS POINTS a a am rid 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 7 Tap EZ REGISTRATION WPS Operation on this camera 221 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Wi Fi ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times e Tap DELETE to delete a characte
89. wired LAN To connect the camera and computer directly by using the DIRECT MONITORING function support for wireless LAN is required 3 Installation of Windows Media Player 12 or later Confirmed operating environment Internet Explorer 9 or later Caution e There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all computer environments For example the video download feature of mobile safari browser etc is not supported Precautions on Using Wi Fi Cautions on Wi Fi Function e Operation is not guaranteed on all devices This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage e Leaving the LCD monitor open makes it easier to receive radio waves Therefore it is recommended to open the LCD monitor when using the Wi Fi function Security of Wireless LAN An advantage of wireless LAN is that instead of using a LAN cable it transmits information using radio waves thus enabling LAN connection to be established within the area covered by the radio waves However as radio waves penetrate through objects Such as walls within the range that they cover security issues such as interception of transmission or illegal access may arise if Security settings are not configured Before you connect to the network in a wireless LAN environment read through the instruction manual for
90. with Selected Files ccccsseeeeeeeeees 85 Creating Playlists by Date ccccccecssseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeens 87 Editing TF IAV ISIS saccdinasaosonainsannayennnnteinnnpacsipasstionensannimnannenens 88 Deleting Playlists sssciesnsncsnmnonaracnienesnadnssiemntaecna siatadensbomnansasaleanee 89 Copying Creating Discs with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive 90 Preparing a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive 91 Creating a DISC a cigaat tate scscedaccaeh oct cccty eoctealicteactnsayeenartennseteceats 92 Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive 98 Creating Discs with a DVD Writer cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 98 Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD9 ccccseeeeeeeseeeeeeees 99 Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD50 ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 99 Creating a DISO secsec e eE 100 Playing Back with a DVD Writer a e 105 Creating a Disc Using a Connected Blu ray Recorder 105 Dubbing Files to a Disc by Connecting to a DVD Recorder 106 Dubbing Files to a VHS Tape by Connecting to a VCR 107 Using a USB External Hard Disk Drive cccceeeeeeeeeee 108 Preparing a USB External Hard Disk Drive 008 109 Copying All PGS ipcae seca cutenenseasntasncdenauoncentnesetetencncesenteneuss 109 Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive 110 Deleting Folders in the USB External Hard Disk Drive 111 Form
91. 0x540 960 x 540 pixels Max 28 Mbps average approx 26 Mbps Zoom during video Optical zoom Up to 40x recording Dynamic zoom Up to 60x Digital zoom Up to 200x Zoom during still Optical zoom Up to 40x Sound quality 48 kHz average 128 kbps image recording Audio Recording media SD SDHC SDXC card commercially available Types of Usable SD Card t p 14 Clock battery Rechargeable battery 259 Specifications Still Image AC Adapter AC V11U Recording format JPEG standard Power supply AC 110 V to 240 V 50 Hz 60 Hz Output DC5 2V 1A Extension JPG Image size Approximate Number of Still Images Unit Number of Shots p 62 Allowable operating 0 C to 40 C 32 F to 104 F temperature 10 C to 35 C 50 F to 95 F during charging Dimensions mm 66 x 28 x 47 2 5 8 x 1 1 8 x 1 7 8 W x Hx D excluding cord and AC plug Approx 71 g 0 15 Ibs Battery Pack BN VG107U GZ E300 Power voltage 3 5V 3 6V Capacity 700 mAh Dimensions mm 31 x 21 5 x 43 1 1 4 x 7 8 x 1 3 4 W x H x D Approx 26 9 0 06 bs Battery Pack BN VG114U GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Capacity 1400 mAh Dimensions mm 31 x 21 5 x 43 1 1 4 x 7 8 x 1 3 4 W x H x D npprex 409 0 09 bs Memo e The specifications and appearance of this product are subject to changes for further improvement without prior notice 260 2012 JVC KENWOOD corporati
92. 1 23 TTS 0 12 34 TEETE we ea lt lt a0 gt gt gt gt am e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode 2 Tap YES DELETE lt 9 REMAINING SCENES 0030 PLAYLISTS THAT INCLUDE THIS SCENE ARE ALTERED OR DELETED Tap Fa Pl to select the previous or next file When no file remains the screen returns to the index screen 80 Deleting Selected Files Deletes the selected files The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Caution Deleted files cannot be restored Openthe LCD monitor Tap sk or A to select the video or still image mode Tap or sf on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap aa to switch to the video mode pili Tap 4 to switch to the still image mode A You can also use the W O button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode CN REC ST MENU e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode 3 Tap TD 4 Tap on the files to delete m DELETE EEEE Pr an Ly EE gs 6 ae m EEA n yi n Ia T Ea E Fear V appears on the selected files To remove from a file tap on the file again e Tap SEL ALL to select all files Tap REL ALL to release all selections Editing 5 Tap SET a DELELE SEL A
93. 3 VIDEO OUTPUT ss p 241 Images are projected horizontally on the TV The color of images e Adjust the TV s screen accordingly looks strange HDMI CEC functions do not work properly and the TV does not work in conjunction with this unit e Adjust the TV s screen accordingly e TVs may operate differently depending on the specifications even if they are HDMI CEC compliant Therefore the HDMI CEC functions of this unit cannot be guaranteed to operate in combination with all the TVs In such cases set HDMI CONTROL to OFF HDMI CONTROL p 241 The language on the display changed t may occur when you connect this unit to a TV with different language setting using an HDMI mini cable Caution e Donotremove the recording medium or perform any other operation such as turning off the power while accessing files Also be sure to use the provided AC adapter as the data on the recording medium may be corrupted if the battery becomes exhausted during operation If the data on the recording medium becomes corrupted format the recording medium to use the medium again Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector If you are using an HDTV you can play back in HD quality by connecting to the HDMI mini connector e Use a High Speed HDMI mini cable as the HDMI mini cable when not using the provided one e Use a High Speed HDMI mini cable as the HDMI mini cable e Refer also to
94. 3 Recording at Intervals TIME LAPSE RECORDING t p 54 The same image is displayed for a long time Use a high speed SD card Class 4 or higher Types of Usable SD Card t p 14 Clean the terminals of the SD card with a dry cotton swab or something similar Execute FORMAT SD CARD in the MEDIA SETTINGS menu All data will be deleted FORMAT SD CARD t amp p 242 The motion is choppy Use a high speed SD card Class 4 or higher Types of Usable SD Card t p 14 Clean the terminals of the SD card with a dry cotton swab or something similar Execute FORMAT SD CARD inthe MEDIA SETTINGS menu All data will be deleted FORMAT SD CARD t amp p 242 Verify the system requirements of your computer when using LoiLoFit for Everio to play back GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Verifying System Requirements Guideline t p 114 Verify the system requirements of your computer when using Everio MediaBrowser 4 to play back GZ E300 Verifying System Requirements Guideline t p 121 Cannot find a recorded file Cancel the date search function Searching for a Specific Video Still Image by Date t p 76 Change the playback media by tapping on the touch screen GZ EX355 Operation Buttons for Video Playback t p 64 Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback t p 74 Select PLAYBACK OTHER FILE in the menu Video files that hav
95. 3 00h07m18s Thumbnail ecording Date Time Playback Time 14 19 OOhOOm36s O Types of image AVCHD iFrame Still Image 175 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 E Transfer Screen 7 Back 00 00 00 00 05 00 00 05 00 00 07 18 Checkbox To Transfer Screen Game Start button Recording Start button Game Over button nd A Recording Stop button Score sheet Goal button Cancel button Mark button Monitor button Caution e Everio sync 2 for iPhone iPad cannot be used when the iPhone iPad is connected to the mobile phone network To make use of this feature connect to the camera or an access point via Wi Fi Using the Markings Enter the mark to make it easy to find the scene later E Common for Android and iOS Tap Marking while recording the video Se ee a ee TPPAUSE ill p as at E p mpn h t ahapsio LE E H pe ee yigg Fause Game Score W 2 Tap the mark icon at the scene you want to mark 176 Monitor e Once a scene is marked the next mark won t be made within 5 seconds Tap Monitor to return to the monitor screen W Screen display of the camera while marking DIRECT MONITORING 0 52 The mark icon is displayed when a scene is marked Using the Game Score The scores of various sport games can be recorded with video images Also the recorded position can be marked to make it easy t
96. 3 Tap RECORD SETTING wag TOP MENU 4 Tap BRIGHTNESS ADJUST ya RECORD SETTING lea al aia E Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 34 Recording 5 Tap MANUAL vm BRIGHTNESS ADJUST e M AUTO MANUAL Compensation range 2 0 to 2 0 Tap A to increase the brightness e Tap V to decrease the brightness 7 Tap SET to confirm Cw REC CR MeN Memo Settings can be adjusted separately for videos and still images Setting Backlight Compensation You can correct the image when the subject appears too dark due to backlight The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Select the Manual recording mode C lt PLAY il MENU If the mode is Intelligent Auto tap A on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap M to switch the recording mode to Manual I A M intelligent AUTO MANUAL 2 Tap MENU GN Ao The top menu appears 3 Tap RECORD SETTING yay TOP MENU CE 4 Tap BACKLIGHT COMP ya RECORD SETTING heal ey eh al as e Tap X to exit the menu e Tap to return to the previous screen 3S Recording 5 Tap ON or ADVANCE Setting White Balance You can set the color tone to suit the light source The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions pm BACKLIGHT COMP
97. 322 001 Connects this unit to a TV to play back recorded images on the TV Consult your nearest JVC service center if you need to purchase the AV cable USB Cable Type A Mini Type B e Connects this unit to a computer CD ROM GZ EX355 GZ EX310 e For installing the provided software on a computer Basic User Guide e Read well and keep in a safe place where it can be accessed easily when necessary Memo e SD cards are sold separately Types of Usable SD Card t p 14 e When using the AC adapter overseas please prepare a commercially available converter plug for the country or region of visit Charging the Battery Pack Overseas t p 21 17 Getting Started Charging the Battery Pack Charge the battery pack immediately after purchase and when the remaining battery power is low The battery pack is not charged at the time of purchase Attach the battery pack e Align the top of the battery with the mark on this unit and slide in until the battery clicks into place 2 Connect the AC adapter to the DC connector age N A j i be AC Adapter To AC _ Outlet 110 V to 240 V T The charging lamp blinks when charging is in progress It goes out when charging is finished Caution Be sure to use JVC battery packs f you use any other battery packs besides JVC battery packs safety and performance cannot be guaranteed e Charging Time Approx 1 h 50
98. 5 3 Mbps is recommended for both the camera sending the data and the smartphone terminal receiving the data If the network speed is too low video images may appear jumpy or audio sound may be interrupted or delayed Monitor Screen Video JPEG 640x360 max 15 fps Audio linear PCM 8kHz 16 bits 1ch Video Transmission Video MP4 compliant H 264 Baseline Profile 640x360 or 1280x720 30p Audio AAC 48kHz 16 bits 2ch Still Image Transmission JPEG format Mi When Using Web Browser Operating Environment Windows 7 Internet Explorer 9 or a later version and Windows Media Player 12 or a later version are installed e For Full HD make use of a computer with the following system requirements CPU Intel Core 2 Duo 2 GHz or higher Memory 2 GB or higher e A network environment with the following line speed is recommended for both the camera sending the data and the PC receiving the data MotionJPEG approx 1 7 Mbps or higher Full HD approx 10 Mbps or higher SD approx 3 Mbps or higher If the network speed is too low video images may appear jumpy or audio sound may be interrupted or delayed Monitor Screen e MotionJPEG Video JPEG 640x360 max 5 fps Audio nil e Full HD Video MPEG 2 TS compliant H 264 High Profile 1920x1080 60i Audio AAC 48kHz 16 bits 2ch e sD Video MPEG 2 TS compliant H 264 Main Profile 720x480 60i Audio AAC 48kHz 16 bits 2ch Video Transmission MPEG 2TS format no conversion Still Image Transmiss
99. 8 After backup is complete click OK Everio MediaBrowser 4 oO Finished successfully as Memo e Before making backup load the SD card in which the videos and still images are stored on this unit f you encounter any problems with the provided software Everio MediaBrowser 4 please consult the Pixela User Support Center Telephone USA and Canada English 1 800 458 4029 toll free Europe UK Germany France and Spain English German French Spanish 800 1532 4865 toll free Other Countries in Europe English German French Spanish 44 1489 564 764 Asia Philippines English 63 2 438 0090 China Chinese 10800 163 0014 toll free http www pixela co jp oem jvc mediabrowser e e Delete unwanted videos before making backup It takes time to back up many videos Deleting Unwanted Files t p 80 123 Copying Disconnecting this Unit from Computer I Click Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media 9 31 PM u o727 2010 2 Click Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device 3 For Windows Vista Click OK 4 Disconnect the USB cable and close the LCD monitor 124 Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media Organizing Files After backing up your files organize them by adding labels such as Family Trip or Athletic Meet This is useful not only for creating discs but for viewing the files too I Double click on the Everio MediaBrow
100. 920 x 1 080 Operation is invalid under the following conditions when menu is being displayed when remaining recording time or battery power is being displayed when any functions in SPECIAL RECORDING is set Recording Taking Still Images in Auto Mode You can record without worrying about the setting details by using the Intelligent Auto mode Open the lens cover Check if the recording mode is A f the mode is sii video tap sii on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap amp to switch the mode to still image 3 Check if the recording mode is Intelligent Auto f the mode is M Manual tap M on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap A to switch the recording mode to Intelligent Auto When focused the focus icon lights up in green 5 Take a still image PHOTO lights up when a still image is being captured e Some displays disappear after approximately 3 seconds Use the D button to change the displays e After recording close the lens cover Memo Depending on the subject and shooting conditions recording may not be performed properly even in the Intelligent Auto mode 2 Recording Indications During Still Image Recording A Image Size Displays the icon of the image size The size of still images can be changed IMAGE SIZE t p 232 TOUCH PRIORITY Displays the setting o
101. 9s Ng am J fsa Lay TA 104 e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode 7 Tap EXECUTE SELECT FROM SCENES REQUIRED DISC SPACE DVD 2 DVD DL 1 PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC e The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed Prepare the discs accordingly 8 Tap AUTO or BY DATE sii mode only SELECT FROM SCENES CREATE HEADLINES ON THE TOP MENU SELECT THE SORT METHOD AUTO BY DATE e When AUTO is selected videos with similar recording dates are displayed in groups When BY DATE is selected videos are displayed according to recording dates 9 Tap EXECUTE SELECT FROM SCENES REMAINING DVD 02 DVD DL 1 EXECUTE STOP When INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO EXIT appears change the disc 10 Tap OK when COMPLETED is displayed SELECT FROM SCENES COMPLETED 11 Press and hold the button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit and disconnect the USB cable Caution e Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is complete Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied Special files cannot be copied either e All DVDs will be finalized automatically Files cannot be added to the DVD R DVD RW later Memo To check the created disc refer to Playing Back with a DVD Writer c p 105
102. Button Exit the menu SETUP Menu SETUP video still image p 238 EDIT Menu EDIT Menu video ts p 235 EDIT Menu still image amp p 237 Clock Setting The SET DATE TIME screen appears when you turn on this unit for the first time after purchase when it has not been used for a long time or when the clock is not set yet Set the clock before recording Openthe LCD monitor The unit turns on When the LCD monitor is closed the unit turns off Tap YES when SET DATE TIME is displayed NO SET DATE TIME DATE TIME When the year month day hour or minute item is tapped A and V will be displayed e Tap A or V to adjust the year month day hour and minute 4 After setting the date and time tap SET 5 Select the region where you live and tap SAVE CLOCK AREA SETTING EEEE LEELLE E 4 ia gt N Ea an Bae E E E E IIE EI SAVE wee eeeee Time difference between the selected city and the GMT Greenwich Mean Time is displayed Tap lt or gt to select the city name Memo e The clock can be reset again later Resetting the Clock t p 19 When using this unit overseas you can set it to the local time for recording Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling p 22 e SET DATE TIME is displayed when you turn on this unit after it has not been used for a prolonge
103. CH 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen 9 Register a password Operation on this camera Operation on this camera i no ree p CANCEL 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times e Tap DELETE to delete a character e Tap CANCEL to exit e Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right The password is not required if the wireless LAN router is not security protected Operation on this camera 10 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS REGISTERED 1 D lebbaadahaladad alaloie iadcinlalalnlalalaindgbalnisialniciaiaistal ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 Other methods such as Manual Registration and WPS PIN 6 Tap ADD Registration are also available Refer to the following link for details ee Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS ACCESS POINTS POINTS p 164 Mi Regular Operation Record videos to send a video mail I Tap MENU Set the camera to the recording mode
104. CT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP 5 Tap CREATE BY DATE video or SAVE BY DATE still image yee SELECT AND CREATE CREATE BY DATE CREATE BY PLAYLIST SELECT FROM SCENES e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode 6 Tap to select a recording date py CREATE BY DATE 93 Copying Memo To check the created disc refer to Playing Back with a BD Writer e You cannot select more than one recording date for copying External Blu ray Drive t p 98 To copy files from multiple recording dates it is recommended to copy by Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t amp p 98 creating a playlist Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos t p 85 Copying Selected Playlists p 95 7 Tap EXECUTE CREATE BY DATE REQUIRED DISC SPACE DVD 2 DVD DL 1 PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC CHECK The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed Prepare the discs accordingly 8 Tap AUTO or BY DATE ii mode only CREATE BY DATE CREATE HEADLINES ON THE TOP MENU SELECT THE SORT METHOD AUTO BY DATE e When AUTO is selected videos with similar recording dates are displayed in groups When BY DATE is selected videos are displayed according to recording dates 9 Tap EXECUTE CREATE BY DATE REMAINING DVD 02 DVD DL 1 EXECUTE STOP When
105. Camcorder Squatting and Shooting at Eye Level Recording Stable Images Staying low is a common position to take when shooting small children By recording from the eye level of the child you can capture all his cute expressions clearly E Getting Ready 1 Kneel down with your left knee while keeping your right foot on the ground 2 Place the elbow of your right arm which is holding the camcorder on This is the standard way of shooting while standing up Be sure to master this basic technique in order to achieve stable images E Getting Ready 1 Open your feet to the width of your shoulders 2 Keep the elbow of your right arm which is holding the camcorder close to your side your right knee 3 Hold the LCD monitor with your left hand and adjust the angle 3 Hold the LCD monitor with your left hand and adjust the angle accordingly accordingly Extending Your Hands to Shoot Panning High Angle Shooting a l l o l e Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide Use this method to shoot a wide angle of view E Getting Ready 1 Shoot by rotating your body instead of moving your arms while keeping the basic way of holding a camcorder as stated above 2 Stand facing the direction where the rotation will stop 3 Twist your upper body to the direction where recording will start 4 Press the start button and record for 2 seconds then slowly twist back
106. D DUE TO CHANGE IN DETECTION INTERVAL e To display the icon tap the e mail address DETECTION INTERVAL can be selected from 15 seconds 1 To cancel the e mail address press the icon one more time minute 3 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes and 60 minutes Up to 8 e mail addresses can be selected Setting the Detection Interval of this Camera DETECT MAIL 6 Tap START p SETTING p 163 DETECT MAIL Check the incoming e mail CONNECTING nae E ee ee ee 8 DETECT MAIL detection standby 215 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 VIDEO MAIL Mi Setting Once setting is done start from the Regular Operation below Create a QR code Memo e Perform operations in step 2 and 3 after creating a QR code and read the QR code one by one by the camera W Enter values in the required items for setting the recipient s e mail address e E mail address set the recipients e mail address e E mail function set the function of the e mail that is transmitted to the recipient s e mail address Up to 8 e mail addresses can be set W Enter values in the required items for setting the sender s e mail address e E mail address set the sender s e mail address W Enter values in the required items for setting the e mail server SMTP server e SMTP server set the name of the e mail server SMTP server from which an e mail account is obtained SMT
107. D card MENU Displays the menu screen File Still Image Tap on thumbnail Starts playback Drag to right Scrolls to the right to show the previous index screen thumbnail display Drag to left Scrolls to the left to show the next index screen thumbnail display Tap to select the media for playback and change the index screen thumbnail display Tap E to return to the index screen gt appears on the last image played back e Lines in different colors are displayed to distinguish the recording date ejej S Cfo OO ej 74 Playback During Still Image Playback Slideshow Playback Still images can be played back in a slideshow Tap P gt during still image playback to start the slideshow a Display Description Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback s p 74 Video Still Image Switches between video and still image meme ee Mode modes e Effects can be added to the transitions in slideshow playback SLIDE SHOW EFFECTS t amp p 236 Rotates to the left rotates by 90 with each Rotates to the right rotates by 90 with each Returns to the previous still image e You can perform the same operation with the zoom lever Starts pauses slideshow Slideshow Playback t p 75 Advances to the next still image e You can perform the same operation with the zoom lever a roursonoscamn Memo Tap or drag on the operation area of the touch screen e O
108. EATE FROM ALL ALL SCENES UNSAVED SCENES e ALL SCENES video ALL IMAGES still image All videos or still images in this unit are copied UNSAVED SCENES video UNSAVED IMAGES still image Videos or still images that have never been copied are automatically selected and copied 6 Tap EXECUTE ALL SCENES REQUIRED DISC SPACE DVD 2 DVD DL 1 PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC EXECUTE RETURN The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed Prepare the discs accordingly 7 Tap AUTO or BY DATE sii mode only ALL SCENES CREATE HEADLINES ON THE TOP MENU SELECT THE SORT METHOD AUTO BY DATE e When AUTO is selected videos with similar recording dates are displayed in groups e When BY DATE is selected videos are displayed according to recording dates 8 Tap EXECUTE ALL SCENES REMAINING DVD 02 DVD DL 1 EXECUTE STOP When INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO EXIT appears change the disc 9 Tap OK when COMPLETED is displayed ALL SCENES COMPLETED 10 Press and hold the button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit and disconnect the USB cable Copying Caution e Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is complete e Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied Special files cannot be copied either e All DVDs
109. ECT MONITORING t p 132 Image Monitoring via an Access Point at Home INDOOR MONITORING t p 135 Image Monitoring via the Internet OUTDOOR MONITORING t p 140 Start Everio sync 2 e Start the application after confirming that the smartphone is connected to this camera 2 Tap the connection method E Dirmrim Cues 1 a Li z DIRECT MONITORING i CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME SCORING FUNCTION INDOOR MONITORING r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT OUTDOOR MONITORING I CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS Demo 3 Tap lt gt to perform the panning operation 157 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 H PAUSE duun ae pn epe Wide Pause BWviarking Game score m Memo Speed of the panning operation can be set in two steps Changing the Panning Speed t p 173 152 Changing the Settings To use the Wi Fi function it may be necessary to perform some settings on the camera and smartphone or computer e Registering the access points to connect wireless LAN router Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS p 164 e Obtaining a dynamic DNS account Obtaining a Dynamic DNS DDNS Account p 157 e Setting the account on this camera Setting Dynamic DNS on this Camera OUTDOOR MONITOR
110. EMAIL SENDER S EMAIL Enter the sender s e mail address SMTP SERVER Enter the SMTP server address SMTP PORT Set this when the SMTP port number needs to be changed Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 AUTHENTICATE METHOD Set this when the authentication method needs to be changed USERNAME Enter the username PASSWORD Enter the password Caution Itis necessary to obtain an e mail account in advance Some web based mail addresses do not support this feature These are Gmail settings as of December 2012 Perform setting manually if changes have been made to the Gmail specifications To make use of addresses other than Gmail please consult the mail service provider Internet provider etc for information on the settings Registering the Recipient s E mail Address of the Camera Registers the e mail addresses of recipients on the camera Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt PLAY The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera HL Rec MENU wag TOP MENU Y 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera laan 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 5 Tap MAIL SETTING Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING 7 RE 6 Tap RECIPIENT S EMAIL Operation on this camera 167 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 MAIL SETTING RECIPIENT
111. ER FILE 6 Tap on the file to start playback Playing Back Videos t p 64 Memo e An MTS file is created in the EXTMOV folder when management information is corrupted e Depending on the condition of the damaged file playback might fail or may not run smoothly 73 Playback Playing Back Still Images Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback You can select and play back the recorded still images from an index screen During Index Screen Display thumbnail display The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Open the LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is f the mode is sii video tap sii on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap to switch the mode to still image You can also use the vi button on this unit Video Still Image Switches between video and still image Mode modes Moves to the previous next date O 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode Displays the next index screen thumbnail display e You can perform the same operation with the zoom lever D Displays the previous index screen thumbnail display e You can perform the same operation with the zoom lever lt REC Switches to the recording mode gt lt lt _ u Displays the index screen thumbnail display to perform deletion E JSD Switches between the index screen of the built in memory and S
112. ESS RECORDING GZ EX355 only D Scene Counter Recorded Time e Press again to stop Some displays disappear after approximately 3 seconds Use the D button to change the displays Memo Depending on the subject and shooting conditions recording may not be performed properly even in the Intelligent Auto mode 24 Displays the seamless recording icon when it is set x appears if seamless recording cannot be performed SEAMLESS RECORDING GZ EX355 tS p 227 Displays the remaining time for video recording Checking the Remaining Recording Time r p 61 Displays the elapsed time of the video that is currently being recorded Recording E Scenes of Intelligent Auto Captures one s skin beautifully Operation Buttons for Video Recording JA i B amp Bo Allows people to be captured naturally aio Record a group of people with the most suitable settings Record the smiling face clearly IEEJ 4 Records while focusing on a near object r EEJ 6 Focuses at a far distance and captures a sharp Operation Description image with vivid colors Buttons pecore egal AE E Video Still Image Switches between video and still image overall image Mode mod Allows night scenes to be captured accurately with T W Zoom Ailowe ihe came E TOREA minimal noise in the overall image lever to be performed Camera shake that often occurs when using the zoom lever can be minimize
113. F e DETECTION INTERVAL can be selected from 15 seconds 1 minute 3 minutes 10 minutes 30 minutes and 60 minutes CHANGE IN DETECTION INTERVAL e To display the 4 icon tap the e mail address Setting the Detection Interval of this Camera DETECT MAIL e To cancel the e mail address press the icon one more time SETTING t p 163 e Up to 8 e mail addresses can be selected Caution 6 Tap START e This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage While on standby for notification mails the focus is fixed Perform the camera settings first then enable notification mails Focus may not be set correctly if the notification mails start before camera settings are made In this case disable notification mails temporarily then enable it again Be careful not to cause too much sending of e mails Depending on the internet provider that provides the e mail service the e mails may be marked as spam or the usage limited may be exceeded 7 Start making a connection Be sure to check the terms of the internet provider in advance to find out if there are any restrictions on the number or size of e mails that can be sent When setting another person as the recipient be sure to obtain his her consent in advance f you reply to the received e mail by using this
114. G about blank vite x 6 w Be 4 e Operations from the Web browser Using the Wi Fi Function from a Web Browser t p 188 Image Monitoring via an Access Point at Home INDOOR MONITORING Connect to the wireless LAN router at home the camera and a smartphone or computer via access point wirelessly From a smartphone or computer in connection you can monitor the images captured by the camera e Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring GIF 4 GE P C F ft Caution This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage e When not monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera is fixed e Even when monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera will be fixed if not operated for more than 3 hours Focus works again when the camera is operated What You Need e Smartphone or Windows computer e Wireless LAN router use a product that has a Wi Fi certification logo Memo a __L__VTHS TTS e Depending on the wireless LAN router in use and signal strength you may experience connection problems or slow connections 135 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Operation Method COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS Connect the camera to the access point wire
115. GATEWAY PRIMARY 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen DNS and SECONDARY DNS are required Operation on this camera IP ADDRESS Enter the IP address das 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera SUBNET MASK Enter the subnet mask DEFAULT Enter the default gateway GATEWAY PRIMARY DNS Enter the IP addresses of the primary and SECONDARY DNS secondary DNS servers rt 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS 6 Tap LAN SETTINGS Operation on this camera 169 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Setting the Password DIRECT MONITORING Sets the password for direct monitoring 8 to 32 characters I Tap MENU Operation on this camera HL Rec _ menu e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU le tg 3 Tap the DIRECT MONITORING aga icon in the Wi Fi menu Operation on this camera Wi Fi E PANS ee 4 Tap PASSWORD Operation on this camera DIRECT MONITORING 170 5 Register a password Operation on this camera PASSWORD Tuv woz once e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times e Tap DELETE
116. ING p 158 e Setting the sender s e mail address Setting the Sender s E mail Address of the Camera t p 159 e Registering the recipient s e mail address Registering the Recipient s E mail Address of the Camera t p 161 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Menu Settings DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING DETECT MAIL VIDEO MAIL Configures various settings related to DIRECT MONITORING e PASSWORD Sets the password to access the camera Setting the Password DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING n p 155 e ENFORCED GROUP OWNER Default ON Set whether or not to get the owner group permissions OFF Set this if connection to devices that support Wi Fi Direct fails When set to OFF connection to devices that do not support Wi Fi Direct will be disabled ON It is recommended to set this usually Setting the Enforced Group Owner DIRECT MONITORING t amp p 156 HTTP PORT Default 80 Changes the port number to access to the camera Changing the HTTP Port DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING c p 156 Configures various settings related to INDOOR MONITORING e PASSWORD Default O000 Selects the password to access the camera Setting the Password DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING n p 155 e HTTP PORT Default 80 Changes the port number to acc
117. LL REL ALL As r 6 Tap EXECUTP to confirm the deletion DELETE REMAINING SCENES 0030 PLAYLISTS THAT INCLUDE THIS SCENE ARE ALTERED OR DELETED EXECUTE STOP RETURN After deleting is complete tap OK To cancel the deletion tap QUIT Protecting Files Prevent important videos still images from being deleted accidently by protecting them Protecting Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed File t p 81 Protecting Releasing Protection of Selected Files p 82 Caution When the recording media is formatted even the protected files will be deleted Protecting Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed File Protects or releases protection of the currently displayed file l Tap MENU cE P TEET E TEE 0 01 23 TTS 0 12 34 KJK am 2 Tap EDIT Wat TOP MENU 3 Tap PROTECT CANCEL vm EDIT PROTECT CANCEL 4 Tap YES a ss E lt 9 PROTECT Tap Fa gt P to select the previous or next file e After setting tap OK 81 Editing Protecting Releasing Protection of Selected Files Protects or releases protection of the selected files The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory I Open the LCD monitor Tap sii or to select the video or still image mode Tap or sf on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap aa to switch t
118. M DATE 0 999 S AG m C appears on the selected video Tap to deselect Tap on the selected video again to check all the videos of the same date After checking tap Tap lt gt or move the zoom lever to display the previous next video e The number on the video indicates the number of videos recorded on the same day 9 Tap ADD and insert the video image She ws 0 999 12 JANE eran TOTAL 00h00m e Repeat steps 8 9 and arrange the videos in the playlist e To change the position of a video in the playlist lower row select the insertion point with lt after step 8 and tap ADD appears when the inserted video is selected Tap to deselect Tap on the selected video again to check all the videos of the same date After checking tap To delete of a video in the playlist lower row tap the video then tap CANCEL 10 After arranging tap SAVE pig FROM DATE 0 999 T AB mes DVD 01 DVD DL 1 11 Tap YES QUIT PLAYLIST SAVE EDITED CONTENTS Memo e Tap X on each screen to exit the menu 87 Editing Editing Playlists You can change the content of a created playlist However the playlists created from Digest Playback cannot be changed The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory I Open the LCD monitor e Check if the recording mode is pil f the mode is stil
119. NG tripod be used and recording be performed in a bright location with the HESPEED subject magnified as much as possible ee Eii Tripod Mounting amp amp p 21 e Tap X to exit the menu e Tap to return to the previous screen 54 Recording 5 Tap to select a recording interval 1 to 80 seconds yet TIME LAPSE RECORDING 7 10 SEC SEC 2SEC 10SEC INTERVAL INTERVAL SEC SEC Ead 1SEC 5SEC 20SEC INTERVAL INTERVAL INTERVAL e The greater the number of seconds the longer the recording interval Tap lt or gt to scroll the screen Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 6 Start recording A frame is taken at intervals of the selected period When the recording interval is set to 20SEC INTERVAL or higher this unit switches to the power saving mode between recordings At the next point to record the power saving mode will be turned off and recording will start automatically Settings of Time Lapse recording are not saved when the power is turned off Indications During Time Lapse Recording Time Lapse Setting The greater the number of seconds the longer the recording interval 1SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 1 second intervals Recorded videos will be played back at 30 times speed 2SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 2 second intervals Recorded videos will be played back at 60 times speed 5SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 5
120. O STORE THE COMBINED SCENES BUILT IN MEMORY SD CARD 9 Tap YES Combining of the videos starts e After videos are combined tap OK Memo e Seamless videos cannot be combined if there is not enough free space in the built in memory or SD card Check the amount of remaining free space before combining e Seamless recording can be performed if the video recording format is iFrame How to Enable Seamless Video Recording Again To start seamless recording again after the previous session is complete it is necessary to combine seamless videos or delete the combination information of the seamless videos To delete the combination information of seamless videos select DEL COMBINED SCENES in step 6 84 Capturing a Required Part in the Video TRIMMING Select the required part of a video and save it as a new video file The original video remains in its existing location The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Openthe LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is pili f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap sii to switch the mode to video You can also use the W O button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode lt PLAY 3 Tap MENU Ii Rec menu ol F 4 Tap EDIT 5 Tap TRIMMING Wag EDIT TRIMMING Editi
121. OINTS 7 Tap EZ REGISTRATION WPS Operation on this camera 203 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 AD EZ REGISTRATION WPS 8 Activate WPS of the access point wireless LAN router within 2 minutes To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 9 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera REGISTERED Lt D behest ahahaha abba chal ohn ioiii baled ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 Mi Search the access point and select from the list Set the name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router and the password beforehand I Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt PLAY The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi X icon Operation on this camera ii Rec MENU ya TOP MENU 3 Tap gt onthe lower right of the screen Operation on this camera a Le rid 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 204 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera ACCESS POINTS 7 Tap SEARCH Operation on this camera The search results appear on the camera s screen 8 Tap the name SSID of the desired access point from the list of search results Operation on this camera SEARCH 9 Register a password Operation
122. OOR MONITORING After checking the URL tap QUIT to return to the previous screen th r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT 3 A Internet Explorer web browser on the computer and enter the NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS PO NT W rcows Interret Lxp orer Golem lm _ amp D 4 OUTDOOR MONITORING fart CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS Demo 4 Login with your username and password e The username is everio and the default password is 0000 Changing the Settings t p 153 Operations from the Web browser Index Jlonitor Pra Using the Wi Fi Function from a Web Browser t p 188 3 The recording screen is displayed HFAUSE m Tele Rec snapshot a ie UL Wide Pause Barking Game Score m e How to operate from a smartphone Using Smartphone Applications p 175 E Monitoring from the computer Windows7 Tap the URL button shown on the camera s screen displayed when the computer and the camera are connected wirelessly The URL for the computer to connect to appears 2 Checkthe URL being displayed on the camera screen which starts from http 206 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 OUTDOOR MONITORING Mi Setting Once setting is done start from the Regular Operation below Obtaining a Dynamic DNS Account By obtaining a dynamic DNS account this unit may be used on the web as usual even if the I
123. OR MONITORING et TOP MENU c p 158 l per 4 Execute OUTDOOR MONITORING N F ke Operation on this camera If OUTDOOR MONITORING is executed while dynamic DNS settings are enabled the camera will access the dynamic DNS server 5 Tap CAMERA NETWORK INFO to check that the URL WAN is displayed Registration complete Image Monitoring via the Internet OUTDOOR MONITORING t p 140 3 Tap OUTDOOR MONITORING aii Operation on this camera seca E in e Registration will be canceled if you do not access the dynamic DNS server e2 from the camera within 3 days Perform the registration again in this case Registration will not be complete if the username and password set on this camera are incorrect Be sure to check that they are correct e Successful registration will be canceled too if you do not access the dynamic DNS server for 1 year 4 Tap UPnP Operation on this camera OUTDOOR MONITORING e Select ON to enable UPnP Select OFF to disable UPnP 157 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Setting Dynamic DNS on this Camera OUTDOOR 6 Enter the DDNS settings username password MONITORING Operation on this camera Sets the dynamic DNS information of the obtained account on the camera USERNAME Obtaining a Dynamic DNS DDNS Account t p 157 Dn EE S NT PORN l Tap MENU Operation on this camera e Tuv wxvz
124. ORDING IS OK MORE FACE DATA WILL IMPROVE FACE RECOGNITION ACCURACY CONTINUE RECORDING wy To proceed to collect face information in the four directions of up SETUP down left and right tap YES It is recommended to continue recording to increase the accuracy of face recognition a To end face registration recording tap NO Go to step 11 9 Rotate the face slowly in four directions to register the face information ROTATE THE FACE SLOWLY e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 5 Tap REGISTER NEW FACE FACE REGISTRATION e Rotate the face slowly while looking at the camera A sound can be heard when recording is complete for each direction 4 times in total Repeat the step until recording registration is complete for all directions e Registration of the four directions may fail depending on the shooting environment In this case tap STOP to cancel recording then tap NO and go to step 11 f the face cannot be properly recognized during recording register the face again 6 Point the camera toward the human subject 7 10 Face the camera with a smiling face 48 RECORD FRONT OF SMILING FACE Recording E i A REGISTERED Recording starts automatically Using the smile display as a reference smile such that the value is as high as possible A sound can be heard when recording is complete e To cancel recording
125. ORE SETTING 3 Tap the desired setting GAME SCORE SETTING TEAM LIST SET THE TEAM NAME AND TEAM COLOR SCORE BUTTON SETTING YOU CAN CHANGE THE NUMBER OF BUTTONS AND NUMBER TO BE ADDED IN THE SETTING CHANGE THE BACKGROL PRIORITIZE THE SCORE YOU CAN ENTER THE SCORE WITHIN 5 SECONDS AFTER MARKING HELP TEAM LIST Set the team name and the color To display HOME and VISITOR tap TEAM LIST TEAM NAME and TEAM COLOR can be set by tapping each button 3 Select TEAM NAME to display the screen for entering the team name Tap the column to enter the team name and press OK Select TEAM COLOR by tapping the desired color from the color palette Tap the button to add a new team SCORE Tap Button Setting to select up to 4 buttons Each BUTTON number indicates the score that can be added once SETTING Select the button s depending on the type of the games 1 button 2 button 3 button 4 button 187 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Using the Wi Fi Function from a Web Browser You can connect to the camera and make use of the Wi Fi function from the web browser of a computer e Indications on the screen Indications on the Screen t p 188 Indications on the Screen Mi Recording Screen Reload To DETECT MAIL SETTING Screen To Still Image Index Screen To Video Index Screen E Ewerio Ak hakli Stream Format Selection click SET
126. P A a Otherwise electric shocks or malfunctions may occur Otherwise electric shocks or malfunctions may occur Memo e All buttons on the DVD writer CU VD50 other than the power and eject buttons will not work when connected to this unit 99 Copying Creating a Disc Prepare a DVD writer Insert a new disc into the DVD writer Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD3 t amp p 99 Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD50 t p 99 2 Copy files to the disc with the following methods Copying All Files t p 100 Copying Files by Date t p 101 Copying Selected Playlists p 102 Copying Selected Files p 104 100 Copying All Files All videos or still images recorded on this unit will be copied You can also select and copy only the videos or still images that have never been copied The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Select video or still image mode 2 Tap CREATE FROM ALL video or SAVE ALL still image CI iD OR 57 10 40 CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE PLAYBACK e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode Tap vil to switch between the video and still image modes 3 Tap the media you would like to make a backup amp CREATE FROM ALL SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP 4 Tap the desired method ax CREATE FROM ALL ALL SCENES UNSAVED SCENES
127. P address changes when making an access to this unit via internet Only the JVC dynamic DNS service can be set on this camera To obtain register an account perform the following steps Access the following URL from a browser and register for an account Operation on a computer or smartphone https dd3 jvckenwood com user Set your e mail address as the username 2 gt Check that you have received a confirmation e mail to the address used in registration and access the URL stated in the e mail Operation on a computer or smartphone 3 Set the username and password used in registration on the camera Operation on this camera Setting Dynamic DNS on this Camera OUTDOOR MONITORING c p 158 4 Execute OUTDOOR MONITORING Operation on this camera If OUTDOOR MONITORING is executed while dynamic DNS settings are enabled the camera will access the dynamic DNS server 5 Tap CAMERA NETWORK INFO to check that the URL WAN is displayed Registration complete Image Monitoring via the Internet OUTDOOR MONITORING t p 140 Caution Registration will be canceled if you do not access the dynamic DNS server from the camera within 3 days Perform the registration again in this case e Registration will not be complete if the username and password set on this camera are incorrect Be sure to check that they are correct e Successful registration will be canceled too if you do not acc
128. P port number set according to the condition when the e mail account is obtained Normally set to 25 e SMTP authentication method set according to the condition when the e mail account is obtained e User name set if the SMTP authentication method is set to other than None Same as the registered user name account name when the e mail account is obtained e Password set if the SMTP authentication method is set to other than None Same as the registered password when the e mail account is obtained Display the screen for reading the QR code I Tap MENU Operation on this camera The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera iil Rec menu ya TOP MENU 3 Tap gt onthe lower right of the screen Operation on this camera 216 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 5 Tap SET FROM QR CODE COMMON Wi Fi SETTING SET FROM QR CODE Tap EXECUTE On SET FROM QR CODE Wi Fi SETTING CAN BE SET USING WEB USER GUIDE OR SMART USER GUIDE EXECUTE STOP Read a QR code Read a QR code Operation on this camera PLEASE READ QR CODE 2 Tap YES SET FROM QR CODE REGISTER RECEIVER ADDRESS UNABLE TO ADD IF 8 ADDRESSES HAVE ALREADY BEEN REGISTERED e Contents of the screen vary depending on the QR code that is read by this unit 3 Tap OK Using Wi Fi
129. REC OFF ON 7 Recording starts automatically when the subject within the red frame moves 0 00 00 0 00 A red frame appears 2 seconds after the menu display disappears For video recording recording continues while there are still movements of the subject changes in brightness within the red frame When there are no more movements of the subject changes in brightness within the red frame recording will stop in 5 seconds e To stop video recording manually press the START STOP button However as the AUTO REC setting remains at ON even after the video recording is stopped recording starts again when movements of the subject changes in brightness are detected within the red frame To cancel AUTO REC set it to OFF Caution e Digital zoom image stabilizer self timer and continuous shooting are not available after AUTO REC is set e AUTO REC cannot be used together with TIME LAPSE RECORDING When both are set priority is given to TIME LAPSE RECORDING e IMAGE SIZE cannot be changed after AUTO REC is selected Set it before selecting AUTO REC e The auto power off and power saving modes are not available after AUTO REC is set Memo e Recording stops when there are no changes for 5 seconds during video recording Settings of AUTO REC are not saved when the power is turned off e Recording may not start when the movemen
130. RECT MONITORING S 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera Mai TOP MENU 5 Check the SSID and the PASS being displayed on the screen of the camera DIRECT MONITORING p 3 Tap the DIRECT MONITORING icon in the Wi Fi menu SET UP Wi Fi SETTING ON Operation on this camera CONNECTING DEVICE Wi Fi ba r TY a ci hadi eae deh PASS KEKRKK RRR EE EREKREK RRR EEE EEKEKK BERET STOP WPS Lii Gem 6 Selectthe SSID in step 5 from the Wi Fi network selection screen of your smartphone and enter the PASS on the password screen gt z J Operation on the smartphone or computer 4 Tap START p Operation on this camera DIRECT MONITORING gt y e For details on connecting your smartphone or computer to a Wi Fi e When iFrame is selected for VIDEO REC FORMAT the following network please refer to the instruction manual of the phone terminal display appears and recording mode is switched to the 60i mode in in use AVCHD 7 A connection is established and appears on the camera s screen DIRECT MONITORING SON 148 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 5 Tap WPS y svnc 2 Operation on this camera DIRECT MONITORING DIRECT MONITORING SET UP Wi Fi SETTING ON CONNECT TO THE CAMERA CONNECTING DEVICE DIRECTLY SSID ittttteettesenssanssneessenesnnes YOU CAN USE THE GAME PASS da ad ahaa as cla babel ale ad Sco RIN G F UNCTI ON
131. Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit reattach them open the LCD monitor and this unit powers on automatically Reset complete 250 Troubleshooting Battery Pack Unable to turn on the power when using the battery pack Recharge the battery pack Charging the Battery Pack t p 12 Check whether the terminals are dirty If the terminal of this unit or the battery pack is dirty wipe it with a cotton swab or something similar If you use any other battery packs besides JVC battery packs safety and performance cannot be guaranteed Be sure to use JVC battery packs Short usage time even after charging Battery deterioration occurs when a battery pack is charged repeatedly Replace the battery pack with a new one Optional Accessories t p 23 Unable to charge the battery pack When the battery pack is fully charged the lamp does not flash Check whether the terminals are dirty If the terminal of this unit or the battery pack is dirty wipe it with a cotton swab or something similar Using a non original AC adapter may result in damage to this unit Be sure to use an original AC adapter The remaining battery display is not correct Remaining battery power is not displayed when the AC adapter is connected If this unit is used for long periods of time in high or low temperatures or if the battery pack is repeatedly charged the amount of remaining battery may not be displayed correc
132. S EMAIL SENDER S EMAIL SEND TEST EMAIL Note Do not continue sending e mails with the same settings if you receive error notifications Depending on the provider you may be marked as a sender of spam junk mail 7 Tap ADD Operation on this camera RECIPIENT S EMAIL 8 Enter the recipient s e mail address RECIPIENT S EMAIL ae BAE estar E oH TUV JWXYZ CANCEL e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times Tap DELETE to delete a character e Tap CANCEL to exit e Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right e After setting tap SET 9 After tapping DETECT MAIL or VIDEO MAIL depending on the function in use tap SET RECIPIENT S EMAIL SELECT FUNCTION TO SET THIS EMAIL ADDRESS AS RECEIVER ADDRESS THEN TOUCH SET abc def com DETECT MAIL VIDEO MAIL An icon 4 appears after tapping DETECT MAIL and the recipient s e mail address for the Detect Mail Anicon i appears after tapping VIDEO MAIL and the recipient s e mail address for the VIDEO MAIL To cancel press the icon one more time Memo Up to 8 e mail addresse
133. SD Card Slot e Insert an optional SD card Inserting an SD Card p 13 Battery Release Lever Charging the Battery Pack t p 12 Battery Mount Interior Speaker Outputs audio sound during video playback ff Video Still Image Button e Switches between video and still image modes SILENT Button e Press and hold the SILENT button to turn on the Silent mode The Silent mode can be cancelled by holding down the button again Using the Silent Mode t p 26 Image Stabilizer Button The setting of image stabilizer changes with every press while video recording is stopped Reducing Camera Shake t p 52 INFO Information Button e Recording Displays the remaining time for video only and battery power e Playback Displays file information such as recording date AV Connector e Connects to the AV connector of a TV etc 5 Power Button e Press and hold to turn the power on off while the LCD monitor is opened HDMI mini connector Connects to TV using an HDMI mini cable USB Connector Connects to computer using a USB cable 245 Names of Parts LCD Monitor LCD Monitor e Turns the power on off by opening and closing e Enables self portraits to be taken by rotating the monitor Using the Touch Screen 1 p 15 Names of Buttons and Functions on the LCD Monitor p 16 Caution e Do not pr
134. SDXC card e Class 4 and Class 6 are guaranteed to have a minimum transfer rate of 4 MB s and 6 MB s respectively during reading or writing of data e You can also use a Class 10 compliant SDHC SDXC card e Both videos and still images can be recorded on one SD card It is recommended to confirm the video operation of the SD card before usage To protect the data do not touch the terminals of the SD card e UHS SDHC SDXC cards can be used in the same manner as standard SDHC SDXC cards UHS Speed Class is not supported When your computer cannot recognize the SDXC card Confirm and update the OS of your computer Windows XP e Make sure that the operating system version is SP2 or higher e Download and install the updating program KB955704 from the following URL http www microsoft com downloads details aspx FamilyID 1cbe3906 ddd1 4ca2 b727 c2dff5e30f61 amp displaylang en Windows e Make sure that the operating system version is SP1 or Vista higher Download and install the updating program KB975823 from the following URL 32 bit version http Awww microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID 2d1abe01 0942 4f8a abb2 2ad529de00a1 64 bit version http Awww microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID 7d54c53f 017c 4ea5 ae08 34c3452ba315 Windows 7 Download and install the updating program KB976422 from the following URL 32 bit version http Awww microsoft com downloads en details aspx F
135. See REGISTERED Playback the scenes mainly with a person whose face FACE SCN is registered Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information tc p 48 ome 2h21im dSiminye45imin MARKED Start a digest playback by piecing the scenes that are SCENE marked during recording e The time display of Digest Playback varies according to the recording time e When it takes time more than 2 seconds for DIGEST PLAYBACK to start after selecting Digest Playback time a progress status will be displayed The Digest Playback time is only a guide 9 Digest Playback starts Ec gt jms eee ee ED 0 01 23 0 12 34 Hom o Tap Il to pause e Tap E to return to the index screen e Tap DIGEST X to return to the normal playback screen Operations During Video Playback Operation Buttons for Video Playback t p 64 71 Playback PLAYBACK PLAYLIST e Playback of the playlist starts Plays back the playlists that you have created Playing Back Videos n p 64 e The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory e Tap Ged to return to the index screen e Tap CHECK and select a playlist to check its content After Open the LCD monitor checking tap 5 e Playlists with a Digest Playback icon are the playlists created during Digest Playback Creating Playlists Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos t p 85 Check if the reco
136. TE to delete a character Tap CANCEL to exit 159 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 e Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number e Tap amp or gt to move one space to the left or right e After setting tap SET 9 Tap CHANGE to change the SMTP port In case of Gmail tap SKIP Operation on this camera SMTP SERVER SMTP SERVER HAS BEEN SET AS FOLLOWS CAN BE CHANGED IF REQUIRED 587 CHANGE SKIP al e Change the SMTP port number if necessary and tap SET SMTP PORT Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap e Tap DELETE to delete a character Tap CANCEL to exit Tap lt or to move one space to the left or right e After setting tap SET 10 Tap CHANGE to change the authentication In case of Gmail tap SKIP Operation on this camera AUTHENTICATION METHOD SMTP SERVER AUTHENTICATION METHOD IS SET AS FOLLOWS SMTP TLS eri e Tap the desired AUTHENTICATE METHOD AUTHENTICATE METHOD 1 Tap NEXT In case of Gmail tap SKIP Operation on this camera USERNAME USERNAME HAS BEEN SET AS FOLLOWS CAN BE CHANGED IF REQUIRED TEST e The following does not appear if AUTHENTICATE METHOD is set to NONE e Tap CHANGE to change the contents that are alrea
137. TESTED PED Sor A E A F F A TEE r ae Tater To download a still image click on the thumbnail E DETECT MAIL SETTING Screen LET Tel Se TTi Notification mail settings such as detection method and recipients e mail address can be changed even when the camera is out of reach 189 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Registered e mail addresses of recipients in Everio Up to 8 A check mark appears on the selected address Everio Notification Mail Settings Detection Method Detection Interval Self Recording ae j click REG to apply 190 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Troubleshooting Direct Monitoring we Unable to connect to camera URL required Unable to browse internet on the computer when it is connected to the camera Video or audio is interrupted or delayed The unit turns off automatically Unable to set focus Connection gets disconnected or a UNABLE TO CONNECT message is displayed Access Point Wireless LAN Router Check whether the Wi Fi connection is established successfully Check whether Wi Fi is connected to DIRECT EVERIO Check whether the smartphone or computer is connected to the camera e Try again after powering off and on the camera and the terminal Smartphone or computer e The camera operates as an access point during direct monitoring Most computers or smartphones cannot be connected to m
138. THE SETTING OF OUTDOOR MONITORING PREVIOUS SETTING WILL BE OVERWRITTEN 3 Tap OK SET FROM QR CODE SETTINGS COMPLETED Step 2 is displayed e Set contents are saved Registering the access points wireless LAN router to this unit E Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Registration Tap MENU Operation on this camera CN REC ST MENU e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU 3 Tap gt onthe lower right of the screen Operation on this camera 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 208 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera ACCESS POINTS 7 Tap EZ REGISTRATION WPS Operation on this camera AD EZ REGISTRATION WPS 8 Activate WPS ofthe access point wireless LAN router within 2 minutes To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 9 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera REGISTERED ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 WE Search the access point and select from the list Set the name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router and the password beforehand I Tap MENU Operation on this camera Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 SEARCH CN
139. TING DEVICE bE Db ea ae ata kaa hap Passe ke 4 Tap START p Operation on this camera 200 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 DIRECT MONITORING When iFrame is selected for VIDEO REC FORMAT the following display appears and recording mode is switched to the 60i mode in AVCHD This display disappears automatically after approximately 3 seconds 2 Tap DIRECT MONITORING but disappears immediately if the screen is tapped m mm am i DIRECT MONITORING CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME SCORING FUNCTION INDOOR MONITORING 5 Tap WPS l i Operation on this camera r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS DIRECT MONITORING POINT SET UP Wi Fi SETTING ON CONNECTING DEVICE ip ee ee OUTDOOR MONITORING Tart CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS WPS 6 Activate WPS on the smartphone or computer within 2 minutes Operation on the smartphone or computer PASS Wakeboard hahaha aaa ade hala a4 Dermo 3 The recording screen is displayed HPAUSE m To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 7 A connection is established and appears on the camera s screen Tele Rec snapshot Wide Pause Monitoring the Images from a Smartphone or Computer Marking Game Score E Mi Smartphone Android iPhone Memo
140. VC will not be responsible for any lost data Please be forewarned In order for quality improvement defective recording medium is subject to be analyzed Therefore it may not be returned Memo e Check the remaining recording time in the media before you start shooting If there is not enough space move copy the data to a computer or disc When there are many files in the media it may take time for them to be displayed on the playback screen Wait for a while as the access lamp appears blinking which indicates normal operation e Do not forget to make copies after recording e Recording stops automatically as it cannot be performed for 12 or more consecutive hours according to specifications It may take some time to resume recording e Forlong recordings the file is split into two or more files if the size exceeds 4 GB You can connect this unit to the AC adapter to record for long hours indoors 26 Depending on the shooting conditions the four corners of the screen may appear dark but this is not a malfunction In this case change the shooting conditions by moving the zoom lever etc Capturing Still Images During Video Recording e PHOTO lights up on the screen when a still image is being captured PHOTO The still images captured during video recording are saved to the destination set in REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE Memo The size of the still image that is captured in the video mode is 1
141. Windows 7 Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide Windows XP Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide E Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows XP Windows Vista 32 64 bit Windows XP Home Basic or Home Premium Home Edition or Professional Pre installed versions only Service Pack 2 Pre installed versions only Service Pack 3 Windows 7 32 64 bit Home Premium Pre installed versions only Service Pack 1 Intel Core Duo CPU 1 66 GHz or higher Intel Core Duo CPU 1 66 GHz or higher Intel Core 2 Duo CPU 2 13 GHz or m recommended Intel Core 2 Duo CPU 2 13 GHz or m recommended RM at least 2 Atleast2GB At least 1 Atleast GB Video editing Intel Core i7 CPU 2 53 GHz or higher recommended Intel Core i7 CPU 2 53 GHz or higher recommended E Other requirements Display 1024x768 pixels or above 1280x1024 pixels or above recommended Graphic Intel G965 or higher recommended Memo f your PC does not meet the above system requirements operations of the provided software cannot be guaranteed e There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all computer environments e For more information contact your PC s manufacturer 127 Copying Installing the Provided Software Built in You can display the recorded images in calendar format and perform editing using the provided software Preparations Connect this unit to a
142. a Adjust by lightly tapping with a corner of an SD card etc Do not press with an object with a sharp tip or do not press hard Adjusting the Touch Panel p 15 Adjusting the Touch Panel Adjusts the response position of the buttons on the touch screen l Tap MENU lt PLAY 2 Tap SETUP HL Rec MENU ya TOP MENU Y The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Tap TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST amp SETUP BEE mo Go The touch screen adjustment screen appears 4 Tap 3 times in total PRESS THE MARK Keep tapping as its position changes with every tap f areas other than the mark are tapped errors will occur Make sure to tap the mark 5 Tap again to confirm the adjusted positions 3 times in total CONFIRM THE ADJUSTMENT PRESS MARK AGAIN Keep tapping as its position changes with every tap 6 Tap Ok 15 Getting Started COMPLETED e Setting ends and returns to the menu screen Caution e Do not tap areas other than the mark during touch screen adjustment steps 4 5 Doing so may cause the touch screen to malfunction Memo e Adjust by lightly tapping with a corner of an SD card etc e Do not press with an object with a sharp tip or do not press hard 16 Names of Buttons and Functions on the LCD Monitor The following screens
143. a SEARCH DATE C e Tap again to cancel the selected date 5 Tap on the file to start playback it SEARCH DATE e You can select videos in the video mode and still images in the still image mode e Only the files recorded on the selected date are displayed e Tap X to stop searching and return to the index screen thumbnail display 76 Deleting Files of a Selected Date Tap U on the index screen thumbnail display to delete unwanted files Deleting Unwanted Files t p 80 Playback Connecting to and Viewing on TV You can connect this unit to a TV for playback The image quality on TV varies with the type of TV and the connecting cable Select the connector that best suits your TV e Refer also to the instruction manual of the TV in use Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector t p 77 Connecting via the AV Connector t p 79 e To display the date and time on TV set both DISPLAY DATE TIME and DISPLAY ON TV to ON DISPLAY DATE TIME t amp p 234 DISPLAY ON TV c p 241 Unnatural Displays on TV O ron O eo Images do not appear on the TV properly Disconnect the cable and connect again Turn off and on this unit again Images may not appear properly when the remaining battery power is low Use an AC adapter Images are projected vertically on the TV Set VIDEO OUTPUT in the CONNECTION SETTINGS menu to 4
144. a new disc into the BD writer external Blu ray drive Preparing a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 91 2 Copy files to the disc with the following methods Copying All Files t p 92 Copying Files by Date t p 93 Copying Selected Playlists p 95 Copying Selected Files p 96 Copying All Files All videos or still images recorded on this unit will be copied You can also select and copy only the videos or still images that have never been copied The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Select video or still image mode 2 Tap CREATE FROM ALL video or SAVE ALL still image CI VIDEO BACKUP CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE PLAYBACK e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode Tap sil to switch between the video and still image modes 3 Tap Blu ray DISC or DVD AVCHD Q CREATE FROM ALL CHANGE REC MEDIA e The media changes to the tapped item Select the appropriate setting according to the disc e Selecting Blu ray DISC enables you to save videos in a Blu ray disc in the high definition quality e Selecting DVD AVCHD enables you to save videos in a DVD in the high definition quality 4 Tap the media you would like to make a backup amp CREATE FROM ALL SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP 92 5 Tap the desired method ax CR
145. ack BN VG107U Supplied GZ E300 BN VG114U Supplied GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Getting Started Grip Adjustment 1 Open the lever on the strap lock 2 Adjust the length of the belt 3 Close the lever Caution e Be sure to fasten the grip belt properly If the belt is loose this unit may drop and result in injuries or damages Using as a Hand Strap Adjust the length of the belt and loop it around your wrist Inserting an SD Card When a commercially available SD card is inserted recordings can still be made to the card without stopping when the remaining recording time on the built in memory runs out Insert a commercially available SD card before recording Types of Usable SD Card t p 14 Approximate Video Recording Time t p 62 I Close the LCD monitor 2 Open the cover 3 Insert an SD card Insert with the label facing outward e Make sure not to insert the SD card in the wrong direction It may cause damage to the unit and SD card Turn off the power of this unit before inserting or removing an SD card e Do not touch the metal contact area when inserting the SD card Memo e When SEAMLESS RECORDING is set to ON recordings can still be made to the SD card without stopping when the remaining recording time on the built in memory runs out SEAMLESS RECORDING GZ EX355 ss p 227 e Both videos and still images can be recorded on one SD
146. amera to start 2 Tap OUTDOOR MONITORING T Tm e el eem DIRECT MONITORING CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME SCORING FUNCTION INDOOR MONITORING r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT OUTDOOR MONITORING fat CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS ra i Dermo 3 Log in with your username and password if authentication cannot be achieved A HTTP AUTHORIZATION AUTHORIZATION FAILED CHECK USER NAME AND PASSWORL USERNAME The username is everio and the default password is 0000 Changing the Settings t p 153 4 The recording screen is displayed HPAUSE Tele Rec snapshot Wide Pause BlMarking Game Score m e How to operate from a smartphone Using Smartphone Applications amp p 175 E Monitoring from the computer Windows7 Onthe Internet Explorer web browser enter the URL WAN that is checked by Operation on this camera cr W rcows Interret Lxp orer aaa x R eC about blank a fs k e a m 2 Log in with your username and password 141 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 e The username is everio and the default password is 0000 Changing the Settings t p 153 Operations from the Web browser Using the Wi Fi Function from a Web Browser t amp p 188 Caution e To monitor images while you are o
147. amilyID 3ee91fc2 a9bc 4ee 1 aca3 2a9aff5915ea 64 bit version http Awww microsoft com downloads en details aspx FamilyID 73f766dd 7127 4445 b860 47084587155f Mac OS X 10 4 Tiger Mac OS X 10 5 Leopard Not compatible Mac OS X 10 6 Snow Leopard Update the OS version to 10 6 5 or later Getting Started Using the Touch Screen Icon operation buttons thumbnails and menu items are displayed on the touch screen according to the mode in use e There are two ways to operate the touch screen namely tap and drag The following are some examples LN Tap the displayed button icon or thumbnail file on the touch screen to make selection 3 Drag the thumbnails on the touch screen to search for the desired file Recording Screen Index screen thumbnail display B Playback Screen Memo The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions The touch screen of this unit is pressure sensitive When the touch screen does not respond smoothly apply slightly more force to your fingertip e Tap the buttons icons on the touch screen accurately The buttons may not respond if they are not tapped on the right area Do not press or rub with excessive force Do not operate the touch screen using an object with a sharp tip Pressing two or more places at a time may cause a malfunction Perform TOUCH SCREEN ADJUST if the reactive area of the screen is misaligned with the touched are
148. and enter the EN URL s fier W rcows Interret Lxp orer GOs Emre 6 MH Bid 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera Wi Fi 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera On Tap SET FROM QR CODE 202 COMMON Wi Fi SETTING SET FROM QR CODE Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 CN REC C eo 6 Tap EXECUTE SET FROM QR CODE Wi Fi SETTING CAN BE SET USING WEB USER GUIDE OR SMART USER GUIDE EXECUTE STOP Read a QR code Read a QR code Operation on this camera PLEASE READ QR CODE 2 Tap YES SET FROM QR CODE CHANGE THE SETTING OF INDOOR MONITORING PREVIOUS SETTING WILL BE OVERWRITTEN 3 Tap OK SET FROM QR CODE SETTINGS COMPLETED Step 2 is displayed e Set contents are saved Registering the access points wireless LAN router to this unit WE Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Registration Tap MENU Operation on this camera The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera yay TOP MENU 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera a oe na 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera ACCESS P
149. and time Set this when you want to save the file with date and time display The date and time cannot be deleted after recording The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions I Open the LCD monitor e When SET is tapped the precaution for date time recording appears Tap X to exit the menu a l is 08d 7 Adjustthe display position of the date and time display with a finger mark EOKA OAE 1S by touching it with your finger and dragging it f the mode is amp still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap viii to switch the mode to video You can also use the IO button on this unit 2 Tap MENU x 11 0 00 00 0 55 e Move the date and time display while touching it with your finger and tracing it on a screen 8 Press the START STOP button to start recording GN TREC ST e The top menu appears 3 Tap SPECIAL RECORDING ya TOP MENU 4 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen nia SPECIAL RECORDING HI Fes pi 2 11 0 00 00 0 55 ag cml e Press the START STOP button again to stop recording 5 Tap DATE TIME RECORDING Caution The date and time cannot be deleted after recording Tap to return to the screen for selecting the types of clock e Tap X to exit DATE TIME RECORDING To perform operations other than recording tap X to cancel the DATE TIME RECORDING
150. aneous still image recording and image stabilizer are not available during STOP MOTION REC e SEAMLESS RECORDING is not available during STOP MOTION REC e When STOP MOTION REC is set the power saving mode is deactivated e TOUCH PRIORITY AE AP SMILE SHOT PET SHOT and AUTO REC are not available Recording Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements AUTO REC This function enables the unit to record automatically by sensing the changes in subject s movement brightness within the red frame displayed on the LCD monitor It can be set for both video and still image modes The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Openthe LCD monitor Set the recording mode to either si video or still image To switch the mode between video and still image tap sil or Cl on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si or to switch the mode to video or still image respectively You can also use the W O button on this unit 2 Compose the picture according to the subject e Adjust the angle of view with the zoom etc 3 Tap MENU lt lt PLAY The top menu appears 4 Tap SPECIAL RECORDING ya TOP MENU iil Rec menu TX F 5 Tap AUTO REC ra SPECIAL RECORDING ee ti gt konaa e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 6 Tap ON Wag AUTO
151. aracters in case of hexadecimal e Enforced Group Owner setting used to enable a connection with a device that does not support Wi Fi Direct Normally set to ON e HTTP Port Normally set to 80 Display the screen for reading the QR code I Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt PLAY The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera HL Rec menu ya TOP MENU 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera Wi Fi 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera Es 5 Tap SET FROM QR CODE Sx COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ISS See Bs 6 Tap EXECUTE SET FROM QR CODE Wi Fi SETTING CAN BE SET USING WEB USER GUIDE OR SMART USER GUIDE EXECUTE STOP Read a QR code Read a QR code Operation on this camera PLEASE READ QR CODE 2 Tap YES SET FROM QR CODE CHANGE THE SETTING OF DIRECT MONITORING PREVIOUS SETTING WILL BE OVERWRITTEN 3 Tap OK SET FROM QR CODE SETTINGS COMPLETED Step 2 is displayed e Set contents are saved WE Regular Operation Connecting the Smartphone to the Camera Wirelessly Mi Connection by entering the Wi Fi password I Tap MENU Operation on this camera Set the camera to the recording mode 199 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 6 Selectthe SSID in step 5 fro
152. ard will be deleted FORMAT BUILT IN MEM GZ EX355 t p 242 FORMAT SD CARD t amp p 242 PLAYLIST QUANTITY EXCEEDS LIMIT Reduce the number of the playlist to 99 files or less Up to 99 playlists can be created CANCELLED BECAUSE PLAYLIST AMOUNT EXCEEDED MAXIMUM LIMIT When creating a DVD reduce the number of playlists to be saved Reduce the number of videos to add to the playlist to 999 files Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos t p 85 Troubleshooting PROCESSING CANCELLED DUE TO LIMITED SPACE FOR OPERATION Reduce the number of videos to add to the playlist to 999 files Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos t p 85 NO FILES GZ EX355 Change the setting of REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE or REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO in the COMMON menu and check that files are not recorded to the other media REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE GZ EX355 t p 242 RECORDING CANCELLED GZ EX355 Set REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO to SD CARD then record to an SD card REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO GZ EX355 p 242 Turn off and on this unit again Protect the unit from vibration and shock CAMERA TEMPERATURE IS HIGH PLEASE TURN CAMERA OFF TO ALLOW IT TO COOL DOWN PLEASE WAIT Turn off the power of this unit let and it cool down before turning on the power again POWER IS OFF OR USB DEVICE IS UNSUPPORTED Turn on the power of the connected USB device Connect the AC adapter to
153. are displayed during the video and still image modes and operate as the touch screens Recording Screen Video Still Image 1 REC C menu Video Still Image Mode Button Switches between video and still image modes 2 Zoom Button Zooming t p 30 3 Playback Mode Button Switches to the playback mode 4 Recording Start Stop Button IIG Video Recording Start Button eGz3 Video Recording Stop Button e J Still Image Recording Button 5 Mark Button for video only e By tapping the icon while recording is in progress you can mark a particular scene to make it easier to find it Marking the Video While Recording t p 53 6 Menu Button Operating the Menu t p 224 7 Display Button Switches the display between full DP and simple D with every tap of the button Simple display Some displays disappear after approximately 3 seconds Full display Displays everything The display button changes from D to DP When the power is turned off simple display D will be set 8 Recording Mode Button Switches the recording mode between Intelligent Auto and M Manual Getting Started Playback Screen Video 00 01 23 00 12 34 Video Still Image Mode Button e Switches between video and still image modes 2 Recording Mode Button e Switches to the recording mode 3 Index Screen Thumbnail Display Button Operation Buttons for Video Playba
154. ation on this camera 213 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 S Beane SEARCH 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen 9 Register a password Operation on this camera Operation on this camera i no ree p CANCEL 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times e Tap DELETE to delete a character e Tap CANCEL to exit e Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right The password is not required if the wireless LAN router is not security protected Operation on this camera 10 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS REGISTERED 1 D lebbaadahaladad alaloie iadcinlalalnlalalaindgbalnisialniciaiaistal ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 Other methods such as Manual Registration and WPS PIN 6 Tap ADD Registration are also available Refer to the following link for details ee Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS ACCESS POINTS POINTS p 164 Mi Regular Opera
155. atting the USB External Hard Disk Drive 111 Copying Files to an SD Card GZ EX355 ccceceeseeeeees 112 Moving Files to an SD Card GZ EX355 ccceeeeeeeeeseeees 113 Copying to Windows PC GZ EX355 GZ EX310 006 114 Verifying System Requirements Guideline 006 114 Installing the Provided Software c ccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 115 Backing Up Filas eee en ee re ee sisih 116 Recording Videos to DISCS ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenees 117 Backing Up Files Without Using Provided Software 119 List of Files and Folders ccccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesaees 120 Copying to Windows PC GZ ES00 ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 121 Verifying System Requirements Guideline 006 121 Installing the Provided Software Built in ccccceee 122 Backing Up All Files ccscuecriatesnssiavoranenreseovscecseaetedereuesenens 123 MOAI ZING FIOS sasemon Erp 124 Recording Videos to DISCS cisssasovceccdevesicededtennucassedeedexeeneneds 125 Backing Up Files Without Using Provided Software 127 List of Files and Folders cccccccssseeeceesseeeceeeeeeseaees 128 Copying to Mac Computer ccccceeeeecesseeeeeseeeeeesneeeeeeens 129 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Wi Fi Capabilities oes Bce ects cette sisemnenecaseante Ssieciedsiouiatnend eoeentes 130 Operating Environment
156. by tapping on the video playback screen e The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions and built in memory Open the LCD monitor e f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si to switch the mode to video You can also use the sifi IO button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode rn oO 3 Tap to open the mark playback mode e When the thumbnail display is tapped directly without tapping the DIGEST button normal playback additional marks can be added starts Tap SET to adjust the playback time per scene and the playback position GAME PLAYBACK GZ EX355 EX310 t p 68 Adjusting the Marked Playback Position t p 69 5 Select the recording date of the video that you want to playback Playback rig SELECT DATE ALL SCENES i mn e Tap ALL SCENES to playback all scenes 6 Select the type of the MARK vig ALL SCENES ALL MARKINGS f MANUAL MARKING GOAL MARKING 7 Digest Playback starts gt 2s See EE ea lt lt a0 gt gt gt gt 0 01 23 a HE c 8 Digest playback stops automatically or display the next screen by tapping MENU NORMAL MARKING P B PLAYBACK AGAIN SAVE TO PLAYLIST SELECT DATE e NORMAL MARKING P B start normal marking playback e PLAYBACK AGAIN start the digest playba
157. c snapshot Wide Pause Bi Marking Game Score m 5 Operate from a smartphone e How to operate from a smartphone Using Smartphone Applications p 175 211 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Go Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera E Setting Once setting is done start from the Regular Wi Fi DETECT MAIL Operation below Create a QR code Memo Ry Coe e Perform operations in step 2 and 3 after creating a QR code and read the QR code one by one by the camera W Enter values in the required items for setting the recipient s e mail address 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING E mail address set the recipient s e mail address Operation on this camera e E mail function set the function of the e mail that is transmitted to the recipient s e mail address Up to 8 e mail addresses can be set W Enter values in the required items for setting the sender s e mail address e E mail address set the sender s e mail address W Enter values in the required items for setting the e mail server SMTP server e SMTP server set the name of the e mail server SMTP server from which 5 Tap SET FROM QR CODE an e mail account is obtained SMTP port number set according to the condition when the e mail COMMON Wi Fi SETTING account is obtained Normally set to 25 I Bee Bo e SMTP authentication method
158. can determine the operating system version processor and amount of memory e For the latest information on iMovie or iPhoto refer to the Apple website e For details on how to use iMovie or iPhoto refer to the help file of the respective softwares There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all computer environments 129 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Wi Fi Capabilities This unit is equipped with Wi Fi function You can do the following using a smartphone or computer via wireless connection DIRECT MONITORING e You can check the image on the camera via direct 1 to 1 connection Wi Fi Direct with a smartphone or computer without the need for an access point wireless LAN router Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring Videos and still images cannot be recorded while monitoring from the computer browser Image Monitoring via Direct Connection DIRECT MONITORING t amp p 132 INDOOR MONITORING e Connect to the smartphone or PC via access point at home using the wireless LAN router to monitor images captured by the camcorder Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring Videos and still images cannot be recorded while monitoring from the computer browser Image Monitoring via an Access Point at Home INDOOR MONITORING p 135 OUTDOOR MONITORING e You can check the image on the camera via internet connection with a smartpho
159. card It is recommended to confirm the video operation of the SD card before usage e To record to the SD card it is necessary to perform media settings e To use SD cards that have been used on other devices it is necessary to format initialize the SD card using FORMAT SD CARD from media settings FORMAT SD CARD ss p 242 13 Getting Started Removing the Card Push the SD card inward once then pull it out straight Types of Usable SD Card The following SD cards can be used on this unit Operations are confirmed onthe SD cards from the following manufacturers e Panasonic e TOSHIBA SanDisk SD Card e This unit supports 256 MB to 2 GB SD cards e Use a Class 4 or higher compatible SD card 2 GB for video recording SDHC Card e Use a Class 4 or higher compatible SDHC card 4 GB to 32 GB for video recording SDXC Card e Use a Class 4 or higher compatible SDXC card Max 128 GB for video recording 14 Memo e Using SD cards including SDHC SDXC cards other than those specified above may result in recording failure or data loss This unit is not guaranteed to operate with all SD cards Some SD cards may not work due to specification changes etc e To record videos with VIDEO QUALITY set to UXP use of a Class 6 or higher compliant SDHC SDXC card is recommended e To select iFrame in the video recording format use a Class 6 or higher compliant SDHC
160. ce to the left or right e After setting tap SET The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU tg 3 Tap gt onthe lower right of the screen Operation on this camera a a om rib 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 5 Tap LOCK SETTINGS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING LOCK SETTINGS INITIALIZATION 6 Seta password up to 4 characters Operation on this camera 172 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Initializing the Wi Fi Settings INITIALIZATION Returns the Wi Fi settings to their default values DO YOU WANT THE SETTINGS 1 Tap MENU RESET TO THE FACTORY PRESET Operation on this camera e To cancel tap NO e When YES is tapped the network settings return to their default values HL Rec _ menu The top menu appears Changing the Panning Speed Change the operation speed of the pan cradle sold separately via 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon smartphone Operation on this camera Select either of the 2 HIGH SPEED or LOW SPEED For details on how to use a pan cradle refer to the following S TOP MENU Using the Pan Cradle Sold Separately p 150 F CY Mi Change the setting via smartphone I Tap Confirm that the camera and a smartphone are connected via Wi Fi and the monitor scree
161. cial files cannot be copied either e Copying may take time For example saving 1 hour video in XP mode takes about 20 minutes e If step 2 is not displayed go to step 3 e f the backup files of video or still image are not made these icons won t be displayed 3 Tap on the folder to play back aes PLAYBACK Tap to return to the BACK UP menu 4 Tap on the file to play back rime PLAYBACK Tap to return to the folder index screen For details on video playback refer to Operation Buttons for Video Playback p 64 Operation Buttons for Video Playback t p 64 To exit stop playback and turn off the camcorder by pressing the button for about 2 seconds Then disconnect the USB cable Memo e Sound or video may be interrupted during playback 110 Copying Deleting Folders in the USB External Hard Disk Drive Files that are copied to the external hard disk drive can be deleted Caution e Deleted files cannot be restored e Be sure to back up important files on a PC Backing Up Files t p 116 Select video or still image mode 2 Tap DELETE oa VIDEO BACKUP CI CI Ce a ins yg e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode Tap the vi icon to switch between the video and still image modes 3 Tap on the folder to delete eg DELETE DELETE FOLDER CONTENTS
162. ck t p 64 4 Delete Button Deleting the Currently Displayed File p 80 5 Menu Button Operating the Menu t p 224 6 Operation Buttons Operation Buttons for Video Playback t p 64 Playback Screen Still Image ce ok FF oe Video Still Image Mode Button e Switches between video and still image modes 2 Rotate Button Rotates a still image 90 Clockwise Counterclockwise 3 Recording Mode Button e Switches to the recording mode 4 Index Screen Thumbnail Display Button Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback t p 74 5 Delete Button Deleting the Currently Displayed File p 80 6 Menu Button Operating the Menu t p 224 7 Operation Buttons Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback t p 74 Index Screen Thumbnail Display Display 3 EEE a 2 a it Ae is gt a REC PLAY xan o MENU OQ W G 6 The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory is not displayed on the GZ E300 EX310 screen l Video Still Image Mode Button Switches between video and still image modes Date Button Operation Buttons for Video Playback t p 64 Operation Buttons for Still Image Playback t p 74 Recording Mode Button e Switches to the recording mode Mark Playback button video only MARKING PLAYBACK t amp p 66 Delete Button Deleting Selected Files c
163. ck again Indications during the Marking Playback During the Normal Marking Playback E E E EEEE El HOME 1 1 VISITOR K Fo co m a Mark Delete button Deletes the mark that is currently displayed 0 01 23 Playback Mark Enter a mark while playback is in progress Button 2 Elapsed Time Displayed the playback time ofthe video the playback time of the video icon displayed Indicates that the current scene is marked e icon displayed Indicates that recording of the score is in progress Score Displays the score of the game displayed only if the score is registered During the DIGEST Mark Playback gt SSS Ss SI p HOME 1 1 VISITOR 6 ay 0 01 23 SES E Display Deseription Date and time display Mark Delete button Deletes the mark that is Deletes the mark that is currently displayed displayed DIGEST Playback Moves to the normal mark playback Cancel Button Elapsed Time Displayed the playback time of the video the playback time of the video icon displayed Indicates that the current scene is marked icon displayed Indicates that recording of the score is in progress Score Displays the score of the game displayed only if the score is registered Memo Once a scene is marked the next mark won t be made within 5 seconds 67 Playback GAME PLAYBACK GZ EX355 EX310 e Game playback is a function to playback the goal scenes
164. computer with a USB cable Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit 2 Open the LCD monitor 3 Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter AC Adapter To AC Outlet 110 V to 240 V To DC Connector amp oan _ J To USB USB Cable To USB Connector Provided Connector 1 1 Connect using the provided USB cable 2 Connect the AC adapter to this unit e This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter 3 The SELECT DEVICE menu appears 4 Tap CONNECT TO PC Ay SELECT DEVICE SELECT DEVICE TYPE TO CONNECT 5 Tap PLAYBACK ON PC CI Mele e7 mi rele PLAYBACK ON PC Tap X to exit the menu e Tap to return to the previous screen e Everio Software Setup appears on the computer Operations are to be performed on the computer after the screen switches Memo f Everio Software Setup doesn t appear double click JVCCAM_APP in My Computer or Computer then double click install or Install exe e If the auto play dialog box appears select Open folder to view files and click OK Then click install or Install exe in the folder 122 Installation Procedure E Windows Vista Windows 7 e Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide E Windows XP e Refer to the operating instructions fou
165. corded files to discs or play back the created discs using an optional BD writer external Blu ray drive Compatible BD Writers External Blu ray Drives You can use BEO8LU20 from LG as of December 2012 Creating Discs with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive WE Preparing a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive Preparing a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t amp p 91 WE Copying to Discs Copying All Files p 92 Copying Files by Date t p 93 Copying Selected Playlists p 95 Copying Selected Files p 96 Select and copy the desired videos or still images individually WE Other Operations Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 98 Memo Videos in iFrame format cannot be backed up e The recordable time on the disc varies according to the way of recording When there are many files to back up it may take time for the backup to be completed Wait for a while as the access lamp appears blinking which indicates normal operation Date and time information as saved as subtitles in the created discs Copying Preparing a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive 4 Insert a new disc Memo When connecting this unit to the BD writer external Blu ray drive use an Mini A male B male USB conversion cable Please note that the supplied USB cable cannot be used for this purpose e To use the USB cable provided with the BD writer exte
166. ctivate while creating a disc complete activation by following the instruction on the screen Copying Backing Up Files Without Using Provided Software 6 Select Computer Windows Vista My Computer Windows XP Copy the files to a computer using the following method Computer Windows 7 from the Start menu then click on the JVCCAM_MEM or UVCCAM_SD icon Open the folder with the desired files 2 Open the LCD monitor List of Files and Folders p 120 Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit 7 Copy the files to any folder in the computer desktop etc Memo e To edit view the files use a software that supports iFrame video AVCHD video JPEG still image files e The above operations on computer may vary with the system used 3 Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter Disconnecting this Unit trom Computer I AC Adapter To AC Outlet 110 V to 240 V Click Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media To DC Connector 2 Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media To USB USB Cable To USB Connector Provided Connector U4 1 Connect using the provided USB cable 2 Connect the AC adapter to this unit 2 Click Safely Remove USB Mass Storage Device This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected 3 For Windows Vista Click OK Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter l l 3 The SELECT
167. d Zooming amp p 30 Prevents colors from fading even when recording in a bright environment such as snowfield and beaches Prevents colors from fading when recording a pray Ogee MONS aN Hes ola terey veenillnee subject in a spotlight Recording Start Functions as the START STOP button Reproduces the green color of trees vividly ele Standby Reproduces the colors of sunset naturally Adjusts settings so that the subject does not By tapping the icon while recording is in appear too dark due to backlight progress you can mark a particular scene to make it easier to find it Records while emphasizing the brightness of the colors Displays the various menus of video recording Reproduces the natural colors of the outdoors Operating the Menu t p 224 during the day Display ButtonD Switches the display between full DP and Reproduces the natural colors of the indoors ina simple D with every tap of the button cold color illumination Simple display Some displays disappear after approximately 3 Reproduces the natural colors of the indoors in a seconds WANA COOPNUMINANGN Full display Displays everything The Selects the most suitable settings for handheld display button changes from D to D shooting When the power is turned off simple display D will be set Selects the most suitable settings when a tripod is used for shooting Recording Mode Switches the recording mode i A M Memo ee
168. d only in the manual recording mode TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF Automatically adjusts focus and brightness based on the subjects faces or selected area Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF t p 44 LIGHT GZ EX355 Turns on off the light Does not light up Lights up automatically when the surrounding is dark Lights up at all times GAIN UP Makes the subject appear bright automatically when recording in dark places Deactivates the function Electrically brightens the scene when it is dark AUTO SLOW SHUTTER Slows down the shutter speed to brighten the scene when it is dark Memo Although AUTO SLOW SHUTTER brightens the scene more than ON movements of the subject may become unnatural 226 Settings Menu WIND CUT Reduces the noise caused by wind SHUTTER MODE Continuous shooting settings can be adjusted Memo e LOW SPEED is set in the video mode The size of the still image that is captured in the video mode is 1 920 x 1 080 e Some SD cards may not support continuous shooting The continuous shooting speed will drop if this function is used repeatedly SMILE SHOT Automatically captures a still image upon detection of a smile Capturing Smiles Automatically SMILE SHOT t p 45 SMILE NAME DISPLAY Displays the names and smile levels when faces are detected Setting SMILE NAME DISPLAY amp p 50 PET SHOT Automaticall
169. d period Connect the AC adapter for more than 24 hours to charge the internal clock battery of this unit before setting the clock e The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions GZ E300 is not equipped with Wi Fi function Getting Started Resetting the Clock 5 Set the date and time Set the clock with CLOCK ADJUST from the menu CLOCK SETTING I Tap MENU TIME When the year month day hour or minute item is tapped A and lt a Ii Rec menu v will be displayed e Tap A or V to adjust the year month day hour and minute 2 Tap SETUP 6 After setting the date and time tap SET ya TOP MENU 7 Select the region where you live and tap SAVE CLOCK AREA SETTING EEEE LLELLE E Pa gt lt i W 4 iE Bee 5 E E E IIE E E E E TEEDE E Time difference between the selected city and the GMT Greenwich Mean Time is displayed Tap lt or gt to select the city name Tap A or V to scroll the screen 4 Tap CLOCK SETTING CLOCK ADJUST CLOCK SETTING m o 19 Getting Started Changing the Display Language The language on the display can be changed The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions l Tap MENU CN REC C MENU 2 Tap SETUP ya TOP MENU J Tap A or V to scroll the screen 4 Tap to the desired language amp LANGUAGE
170. d required to access the camera e Up to 8 characters alphabets numbers and symbols only case sensitive Tap MENU Operation on this camera The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera HL Rec MENU ya TOP MENU 3 Tap INDOOR MONITORING Fir or OUTDOOR MONITORING T2 Operation on this camera BES 4 Tap PASSWORD Operation on this camera 5 Register a password Operation on this camera ABC DELETE i wo PQRS TUV WXYZ CANCEL By default the password is set to 0000 INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times Tap DELETE to delete a character Tap CANCEL to exit Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap amp or gt to move one space to the left or right 6 Tap SET Operation on this camera Settings will not be saved until SET is tapped Changing the HTTP Port DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING Changes the port number to access to the camera Valid when setting up multiple cameras for Outdoor Monitoring I Tap MENU Operation on this camera
171. dapter charge the battery for more than 24 hours and set the clock If the message still appears the clock battery is exhausted Consult your nearest JVC dealer Clock Setting p 18 COMMUNICATION ERROR Reconnect the USB cable Turn off this unit and the devices connected to it and turn them on again Reattach the battery pack FORMAT ERROR GZ EX355 Check the operating procedure and perform once again FORMAT BUILT IN MEM GZ EX355 ts p 242 Turn off and on this unit again ERROR IN BUILT IN MEMORY GZ EX355 Turn off and on this unit again If the above does not solve the problem back up your files and execute FORMAT BUILT IN MEM in the MEDIA SETTINGS menu All data will be deleted FORMAT BUILT IN MEM GZ EX355 t p 242 MEMORY CARD ERROR Check that the card is supported by this unit Types of Usable SD Card t p 14 Turn off and on this unit again Remove the AC adapter and battery pack then remove and re insert the SD card Remove any dirt from the SD card terminals If the above does not solve the problem back up your files and execute FORMAT SD CARD in the COMMON menu All data will be deleted FORMAT SD CARD t amp p 242 NOT FORMATTED Select OK then select YES on the DO YOU WANT TO FORMAT screen RECORDING FAILURE Turn off and on this unit again CANNOT TAKE MORE STILL IMAGES AT THIS TIME St
172. detected depending on the shooting environment e You can register personal authentication information like face name and priority level of person before recording Up to 3 registered names will be displayed according to the priority level Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information t p 48 e SMILE NAME DISPLAY is set to ON when the demo mode is activated DEMO MODE t p 239 Recording Editing the Registered Face Information 6 Tap the item to edit Editing the Registered Face Information e You can change the name priority level and face information that are RECORD AGAIN registered The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions CHANGE NAME I Tap MENU CHANGE ORDER OF PRIORITY _ e If you select RECORD AGAIN proceed to step 6 in Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information t p 48 f you select CHANGE NAME proceed to step 12 in Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information t p 49 f you select CHANGE ORDER OF PRIORITY proceed to step 13 lt lt PLAY il Ce MENU in Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information c p 49 J TOE OP MENUA pEArS Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information 2 Tap SETUP t p 48 ya TOP MENU Canceling Deleting the Registered Face Information You can cancel delete t
173. dition can be selected Shooting According to Scene Subject p 32 Displayed only in the manual recording mode FOCUS Focus can be adjusted manually Adjusting Focus Manually t amp p 33 Displayed only in the manual recording mode BRIGHTNESS ADJUST Adjusts the overall brightness of the screen Adjusting Brightness t p 34 Displayed only in the manual recording mode BACKLIGHT COMP Corrects the image when the subject appears dark due to backlight Setting Backlight Compensation t p 35 Displayed only in the manual recording mode WHITE BALANCE Adjusts the color according to the light source Setting White Balance t p 36 Displayed only in the manual recording mode TELE MACRO Enables close up shots when using the telephoto T end of the zoom Taking Close up Shots t p 37 Displayed only in the manual recording mode TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF Automatically adjusts focus and brightness based on the subjects faces or selected area Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF t p 44 SELF TIMER Use this when taking a group photo Taking Group Shots Self timer p 58 GAIN UP Makes the subject appear bright automatically when recording in dark places Deactivates the function Electrically brightens the scene when it is dark Memo Setting can be adjusted separately for videos GAIN UP Video t amp p
174. ds such as Manual Registration and WPS PIN Registration are also available Refer to the following link for details Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS c p 164 Connecting the smartphone or computer to the access point wireless LAN router Connect the smartphone or computer to the access point wireless LAN router at home e For details on connections refer to the instruction manuals of the device in use or the wireless LAN router This setting is unnecessary if the smartphone or computer has already been connected to the access point wireless LAN router at home 137 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Monitoring the images by connecting the smartphone and the camera e Install Everio sync 2 on the smartphone in advance Installing Smartphone Applications p 175 WE Operation on this camera Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt PLAY e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera HL Rec menu ya TOP MENU 3 Tap INDOOR MONITORING r Operation on this camera rik 4 Tap START mp Operation on this camera 5 Start making a connection Operation on this camera INDOOR MONITORING CONNECTING ACA IR Iie aaa ate lace ahah dated cashed ald 138 e Name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router in conn
175. dy set 160 e Enter the username and tap SET USERNAME RRR i no A a 1 QRS TUV JWXYZ Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap Tap DELETE to delete a character Tap CANCEL to exit Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right e After setting tap SET 12 Tap NEXT Operation on this camera CANCEL PASSWORD PLEASE ENTER PASSWORD NEXT Cad e The following does not appear if AUTHENTICATE METHOD is set to NONE e Tap CHANGE to change the contents that are already set e Enter the password and tap SET PASSWORD DEF e Ssu mje PARS Tuv Iwxyz e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap e Tap DELETE to delete a character Tap CANCEL to exit e Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right e After setting tap SET 13 Tap QUIT or SEND TEST EMAIL Operation on this camera A a 1 CANCEL CONTENTS SET AS FOLLOWS EMAIL ADDRESS text gmail com SMTP SERVER smtp gmail com SMTP PORT 587 AUTHENTICATE METHOD SMTP TLS USERNAME test QUIT SEND TEST
176. e Christmas Be sure to record these happy family times E Decorating the tree Finding the Presents A tree is the most important thing to bring out the mood of Christmas For children the greatest joy of Christmas is receiving presents the next Simply the scene of all family members engaging in the decorating of a fir morning Their expression of delight when finding a present next to their tree with various colorful ornaments is full of the feeling of happiness pillow is a recording opportunity not to be missed Get ready to shoot before i i the children wake up W Preparing the Dinner Photo by Manicosity Creative Commons Attribution No Derivative Works 3 0 Record the scenes as everyone helps to prepare the feast of the night You can film the mother who is cooking the children who are helping and of course the process of making a cake Useful Shooting Techniques Wedding Create an awesome wedding video for the bride and groom Discussing and Planning Before the Event Before the day of the wedding reception it is important to discuss with the bride and groom about various details such as the order of the ceremony and whether there are any entertainment programs or change of clothes By understanding the preferences of the bride and groom you will be able to shoot more appropriately E Finding out the route of entrance The highlight of a wedding reception is the entrance of the bride and g
177. e damaged management information can be played back PLAYBACK OTHER FILE t p 73 Images do not appear on the TV properly Disconnect the cable and connect again Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector t p 77 Turn off and on this unit again Images are projected vertically on the TV Set VIDEO OUTPUT in the MEDIA SETTINGS menu to 4 3 VIDEO OUTPUT t amp p 241 Adjust the TV s screen accordingly The image displayed on TV is too small Set VIDEO OUTPUT in the MEDIA SETTINGS menu to 16 9 VIDEO OUTPUT 0 p 241 Troubleshooting When connected to the TV via the HDMI mini cable proper images and sounds are not output Images and sounds may not be output properly depending on the TV connected In such cases perform the following operations 1 Disconnect the HDMI mini cable and connect it again 2 Turn off and on this unit again Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector t p 77 Editing Copying Unable to delete file Files videos still images that are protected cannot be deleted Release protection before deleting the file Protecting Files t p 81 Unable to copy move files to SD card GZ EX355 If the SD card is write protected set it to off Unable to create DVD with a DVD writer Connect the USB cable correctly Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD50 p 99 Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD3 t p 99
178. e actually continuous recording of 60 still images within 1 minute using this function allows you to select the best moment and save it as a still image Capturing a Still Image in the Video During Playback t p 83 Photo by just that good guy jim Creative Commons Attribution No Derivative Works 3 0 Video Playback in Progress Photo by just that good guy jim Creative Commons Attribution No Derivative Works 3 0 Video Playback in Progress Advanced Operation with Backlight Compensation When the subject s face is in backlight or when the expression cannot be seen clearly the Intelligent Auto function of this unit automatically increases 9 Useful Shooting Techniques its brightness for recording If Intelligent Auto fails to function as expected or if the brightness correction is insufficient you can increase the brightness by using backlight compensation in the Manual mode Setting Details p 35 E lt Without backlight compensation gt 10 Getting Started Verifying the Accessories If any of the items are missing or defective consult your JVC dealer or the nearest JVC service center pustration eseriptiom AC Adapter AC V11U Connects to this unit to charge the battery pack It can also be used when recording or playing back videos indoors Battery Pack BN VG107U GZ E300 BN VG114U GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Attaches to this unit to supply power AV Cable QAM1
179. e attaching it Keep away from direct contact with a warm pack e Do not expose the battery to excessive heat such as direct sunlight or fire e After removing the battery store it in a dry place between 15 C to 25 C 59 F to 77 F Keep a 30 battery level LB if the battery pack is not to be used for a long period of time In addition fully charge and then fully discharge the battery pack every 6 months then continue to store it at a 30 battery level La Memo You can connect this unit to the AC adapter to record for long hours indoors Battery charging begins when the LCD monitor is closed Detaching the Battery Pack To detach the battery pack perform the above steps in reverse order Slide the battery release lever to detach the battery from this unit Approximate Battery Charging Time Using AC Adapter Charging time 1h50m 2h30m 3h30m 6h10m e When the battery life is reached the recording time becomes shorter even if the battery pack is fully charged Replace the battery pack with a new one The charging time is when the unit is used at 25 C 77 F If the battery pack is charged outside the room temperature range of 10 C to 35 C 50 F to 95 F charging may take a longer time or it may not start The recordable and playable time may also be shortened under some usage conditions such as at low temperature Approximate Recording Time Using Battery p 63 Battery P
180. e instruction manuals of the TV and DVD recorder Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit 2 Open the LCD monitor 3 Connect to a DVD recorder 1 Yellow Video Input S Video Input White To AV Connector S Audio Input L AV Cable Provided ed pP S Audio Input R Outlet VCR DVD Recorder t 2 aT To DC Connector 1 Connect using the provided AV cable 2 Connect the AC adapter to this unit e This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter 4 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode CN REC OS ea 5 Prepare the TV DVD recorder for recording e Switch to a compatible external input Insert a disc DVD R etc into the DVD recorder 6 Prepare this unit for playback Set VIDEO OUTPUT in the CONNECTION SETTINGS menu to the aspect ratio 4 3 or 16 9 of the connecting TV VIDEO OUTPUT p 241 7 Start recording Start playback on this unit and press the record button on the recorder Playing Back Videos t p 64 e After playback is complete stop the recording 106 Copying Memo AV cable P N QAM1322 001 Dubbing Files to a VHS Tape by Connecting Wiring specifications for video audio of the 4 pole mini plug are described toa VCR Do You can dub videos in standard quality by
181. ect ee eattetes saeco e eect deeseudeeaeteconatareieeseedesherccen 43 Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF 44 Capturing Smiles Automatically SMILE SHOT 45 Capturing Pets Automatically PET SHOT 00008 46 Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information Setting SMILE NAME DISPLAY ccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeens 50 Editing the Registered Face Information cccccseeeee 51 Reducing Camera Shake enciectessndeccsarenreinaessesdtenaocemeenisesieterwe 52 Marking the Video While Recording cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 53 Slow motion High speed Recording ccccsseeeeeesseeeeeenees 53 Recording at Intervals TIME LAPSE RECORDING 54 Recording Stop Motion Videos STOP MOTION REC 56 Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements AUTO REC EAE Sen ne EEEE E E E E O E 57 Taking Group Shots Self timer ccccccsseeeeecssseeeseeeeees 58 Recording Videos with Date and Time ccccseeeeeeeeeeeees 60 Checking the Remaining Recording Time 0 ceeeeee 61 Playback Playing BACK VICCOS vaccnon accecanavsnatedeeacoreseascnnat aut vasesecst ester 64 Normal Playback ones ctttencancdastncctennaccemsecetonteutareteregstenetenncteuss 66 MARKING PLAYBACK wcccctsccssecctsnmcdcsassteuteantoescetmectasceiaasaces 66 DIGEST PLAYBACK secsec iorri AEE 70 PLAYBACK PLAYLIST sssussionssitwossnsacs
182. ection is displayed 6 The following is displayed when the camera is connected to the access point e Tap URL to display the URL required for connecting the camera from browser WE Operation on the smartphone Start Everio sync 2 on the smartphone after setting INDOOR MONITORING Tap START in INDOOR MONITORING on the camera to start 2 Tap INDOOR MONITORING ae os DIRECT MONITORING Fin CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME SCORING FUNCTION INDOOR MONITORING r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT OUTDOOR MONITORING Tatt CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS F T 3 The recording screen is displayed Demo Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 HPAUSE il L Tele Rec snapshot Wi UU Wide Pause E Marking Game Score m e How to operate from a smartphone Using Smartphone Applications p 175 E Monitoring from the computer Windows7 Tap the URL button shown on the camera s screen displayed when the computer and the camera are connected wirelessly The URL for the computer to connect to appears 2 Checkthe URL being displayed on the camera screen which starts from http CAMERA NETWORK INFO URL LAN http eee te ene e After checking the URL tap QUIT to return to the previous screen
183. ed automatically even without specific selection In addition registered faces may be tracked back again even if they are lost Therefore it is recommended to register the faces that are often being recorded by this camera beforehand Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information t p 48 Capturing Smiles Automatically SMILE SHOT SMILE SHOT automatically captures a still image upon detection of a smile This function is available for both videos and still images Set TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF to FACE TRACKING before selecting SMILE SHOT Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF t p 44 The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions I Open the LCD monitor Set the recording mode to either vii video or still image To switch the mode between video and still image tap sii or Cl on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si or to switch the mode to video or still image respectively You can also use the si l button on this unit 2 Tap MENU lt PLAY The top menu appears Tap RECORD SETTING Go to step 4 Alternatively tap SMILE SHOT in the shortcut menu Go to step 6 HL Rec menu G ya TOP MENU R Tap gt on the lower right of the screen yay RECORD SETTING x 1 A On Tap SMILE SHOT ving RECORD SETTING Ea HBE A OFF _c
184. ed via smartphone by setting the camera on the pan cradle sold separately Using the Pan Cradle Sold Separately t p 150 For how to connect the pan cradle efer to the instruction manual of the Pan Cradle for further details Terms Used in this Guide In this guide operations on the touch panel are described as tap e While the names of the buttons on a smartphone are written as MENU or RETURN they may vary according to the smartphone in use Refer also to the instruction manual of your smartphone 130 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Operating Environment To check the image on the camera from a computer or smartphone and to transfer videos still images it is necessary to meet the following requirements Android Smartphone and Tablet Device 1 OS Android2 3 or higher This unit is not guaranteed to operate with all models 2 Supports GPS function for GPS recording 3 Able to connect to the internet or Google Play Everio sync 2 required for software installation iPhone iPad iPod touch 1 OS iOS5 1 or higher This unit is not guaranteed to operate with all models 2 Able to connect to the internet or App Store required for software installation Computer To check the image on the camera from a computer browser and to transfer videos still images it is necessary to meet the following requirements 1 OS Windows 7 2 Supports wireless LAN or
185. ediaBrowser 4 Player to play back an AVCHD disc Refer to the help file of the provided Everio MediaBrowser 4 software to operate When copying videos recorded in UXP recording mode to create an AVCHD disc the videos need to be converted to XP recording mode before copying Therefore it may take a longer time than copying videos recorded in other modes To view the help file of Everio MediaBrowser 4 select Help from the Everio MediaBrowser 4 s menu bar or press F1 on the keyboard f you encounter any problems with the provided software Everio MediaBrowser 4 please consult the Pixela User Support Center Telephone USA and Canada English 1 800 458 4029 toll free Europe UK Germany France and Spain English German French Spanish 800 1532 4865 toll free Other Countries in Europe English German French Spanish 44 1489 564 764 Asia Philippines English 63 2 438 0090 China Chinese 10800 163 0014 toll free http www pixela co jp oem jvc mediabrowser e Copying Backing Up Files Without Using Provided Software 6 Select Computer Windows Vista My Computer Windows XP Copy the files to a computer using the following method Computer Windows 7 from the Start menu then click on the JVCCAM_MEM or UVCCAM_SD icon Open the folder with the desired files 2 Open the LCD monitor List of Files and Folders p 128 Remove the AC
186. eek black design USB2 0 series from LaCie Memo Before purchasing check the compatible devices on the LaCie website e LaCie http Awww lacie com home htm cc 1 e USB external hard disk drives up to 2 TB can be used Copying and Playback with a USB External Hard Disk Drive Preparing a USB External Hard Disk Drive t p 109 Copying All Files p 109 Playing Back Files in the USB External Hard Disk Drive p 110 Deleting Folders in the USB External Hard Disk Drive p 111 Memo Format the USB external hard disk drive when connecting it to this unit for the first time All data will be deleted Formatting the USB External Hard Disk Drive t p 111 Refer to the help file of the provided LoiLoFit for Everio software when you use the PC to operate the data in the USB external hard disk drive directly copied from this unit e USB external hard disk drives with the capacity over 2 TB cannot be used e Copying may take time For example saving 1 hour video in XP mode takes about 20 minutes e When there are many files to back up it may take time for the backup to be completed Wait for a while as the access lamp appears blinking which indicates normal operation Sound or video may be interrupted during playback Caution Do not connect a USB hub between this unit and the USB external hard disk drive Disconnect the USB external hard disk drive when usin
187. eem DIRECT MONITORING P CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY i l YOU CAN USE THE GAME 5 Start making a connection SCORING FUNCTION Operation on this camera INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS CONNECTING POINT RIOTS Lak a cae a aaa OUTDOOR MONITORING Tato CONNECT VIA INTERNET Name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router in connection a tier ta HEE is displayed 6 The following is displayed when the camera is connected to the access pomt Demo 3 Login with your username and password if authentication cannot be achieved The URL WAN for the smartphone to connect to appears 210 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 E Monitoring from the computer Windows7 Onthe Internet Explorer web browser enter the URL WAN that is checked by Operation on this camera grer W rcows Interret Lxp orer G ka e 2 about blank A HTTP AUTHORIZATION t x ve p G Bied AUTHORIZATION FAILED CHECK USER NAME AND PASSWORL 2 Login with your username and password The username is everio and the default password is 0000 Changing the Settings t p 153 Operations from the Web browser e The username is everio and the default password is 0000 Changing the Settings t p 153 4 The recording screen is displayed PAUSE m Tele Re
188. egistered to a playlist Creating Playlists with Selected Files p 85 Creating Playlists by Date t p 87 Editing Playlists c p 88 TRIMMING Select the required part of a video and save it as a new video file The original video remains in its existing location Capturing a Required Part in the Video TRIMMING p 84 SEAMLESS REC CTRL GZ EX355 Videos that are recorded on two separate media and with SEAMLESS RECORDING in the video recording menu enabled can be combined into a single video Combining Videos Recorded by Seamless Recording t p 83 235 Settings Menu PLAYBACK SETTING Menu still image SEARCH DATE Narrows down the still image index screen according to recording dates Searching for a Specific Video Still Image by Date p 76 SLIDE SHOW EFFECTS Sets the transition effects in slideshow playback SLIDE Switches the screen by sliding in from right to left BLINDS Switches the screen by dividing into vertical strips CHECKERBOARD Switches the screen by changing through a checkered pattern RANDOM Switches the screen with a random effect from SLIDE BLINDS and CHECKERBOARD Memo e Slideshow effects are not available when playing back still images in external devices such as USB external hard disk drives 236 Settings Menu EDIT Menu still image PROTECT CANCEL Protects files from being deleted accidentl
189. en there are objects in displayed between or when microwave ovens or other wireless devices are in use e f connection cannot be established again restart the terminal Smartphone or computer Screen does not refresh or remains black e Check if the camera and the access point are properly connected Images cannot be detected on the terminal smartphone or computer if the camera is disconnected from the access point halfway through XUPnP is displayed This appears when UPnP has failed Check whether the wireless LAN router in use is compatible with UPnP Refer to the instruction manual of the wireless LAN router in use or consult the manufacturer of the router When the wireless LAN router in use is compatible with UPnP turn on the UPnP function e f the icon does not disappear even when the UPnP function is enabled turn off and on the power of the wireless LAN router in use as well as the camera then try again Unable to connect although XUPnP is e When UPnP is set to OFF UPnP will not appear In such cases set UPnP to ON displayed e When port 80 has been used by other devices via UPnP connection cannot be established Reconnect the camera 193 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 When the HTTP Port of the camera set to 80 by default is used by another device connection cannot be established Change the HTTP Port of the camera Changing t
190. er to the help file of App Store Operating the Smartphone Applications e Indications on the screen Indications on the Screen t p 175 e Transferring videos Transferring Videos AVCHD format p 179 Transferring Videos iFrame format t p 182 e Transferring still images Transferring Still Images p 184 e Changing the settings Smartphone Application Settings p 186 Indications on the Screen Terps nee To Settings Screen DIRECT MONITORING Fi CONNECT TO THE CAMERA E Initial Screen Connect to the camera directly DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME INDOOR MONITORING Connect via access point CONNECT VTA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT OUTDOOR MONITORING Connect via CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO internet REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND NMAC To Demo Demo Screen To Help Screen E Recording Screen To Index Screen To Settings Screen Running on AC Adapter iaa Running on Battery icon shown on left is when battery power is less than 30 Enable Disable GPS icon shown is when disabled Il Record Standby Recording in Progress Zoom Button Video Recording Start Button SSS te Still Image Recording Button Snapshot Video Recording Stop Button To Game Score Screen To Marking Screen Mi Index Screen AVCHD Video iFrame Video Still image To Monitor Screen dex To Settings Screen iu 23 4
191. ers Travel If video editing is to be done record using two camcorders so that a video l j i with varying scenes can be created You can try asking a close friend who Capture all the good times of your domestic or overseas trips has a camcorder at home Set the borrowed camcorder on a tripod to focus a on taking close up shots of the bride and groom In this way the other camcorder can be moved around to record other scenes enabling an interesting video with changing scenes to be created through editing and compilation As most people own at least a digital camera nowadays even if you are really unable to find an extra camcorder inserting still pictures to the video at various points is also a good way to add variety Do give it a try E lt Camcorder 1 gt Closing up on the bride and groom all the time Bringing the Necessary Equipment The necessary things to bring on a trip depends on your traveling purpose and the destination For overseas trips in particular you have to think about what to bring in accordance to the local conditions Here are some suggestions for your consideration E Camcorder Think about how many hours of shooting you will usually perform in a day Be sure to prepare enough recording medium especially for long overseas trips If you are recording in SD cards get ready the sufficient number of cards including some for backup E lt Camcorder 2 gt Recording the congratulatory messages from friends atthe
192. ervice using your computer URL 2 Log into JVC DNS and obtain the dynamic DNS service How 3 Set the obtained dynamic DNS username and password on the camera Only the JVC dynamic DNS service can be set on this camera e The URL WAN will not appear if dynamic DNS is not set on the camera To set dynamic DNS perform the following steps 1 Obtain an account with JVC dynamic DNS service using your computer https dd3 jvckenwood com user 2 Log in to JVC DNS and obtain the dynamic DNS service 3 Set the obtained dynamic DNS username and password on the camera Only the JVC dynamic DNS service can be set on this camera Unable to access the entered URL cannot e This function cannot be used in an environment with two or more routers be found Check that the dynamic DNS username and password are correct e The router in use is not compatible with UPnP or UPnP is turned off Check the instruction manual of the router in use and turn on UPnP e The UPnP of the camera is set to OFF By default it is set to ON Set UPnP to ON Depending on the terms of service with your provider it may not be possible to obtain a global IP address Confirming global IP address t p 140 Check whether a terminal that uses port 80 such as web servers has been set in the network or if a specific terminal has been set to use port 80 on the router In such case change the HTTP Port of t
193. es Memo e Not all HDMI control devices comply with the HDMI CEC standard The HDMI control function of this unit will not work when connected to these devices This unit is not guaranteed to operate with all HDMI CEC enabled devices e Depending on the specifications of each HDMI CEC enabled device some functions may not work with this unit For details refer to the instruction manual of your TV Unintended operations may occur with some connected devices In these cases set HDMI CONTROL to OFP HDMI CONTROL t amp p 241 Preparations e Connect an HDMI mini cable between this unit and the TV Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector t p 77 e Turn onthe TV and set the HDMI CEC related setting to ON For details refer to the instruction manual of the TV Set HDMI CONTROL in the CONNECTION SETTINGS menu to ON HDMI CONTROL p 241 Operation Method 1 Turn on this unit 2 Select the playback mode 3 Connect the HDMI mini cable e TV turns on automatically and switches to HDMI input mode when this unit is turned on Operation Method 2 Turn off the TV e This unit turns off automatically Memo e Depending on the TV connected the display language of this unit will automatically switch to the language that is selected for the TV when this unit is turned on This is applicable only if this unit supports the language selected for the TV
194. ess against the surface with force or subject it to strong impact Doing so may damage or break the screen 246 Indications on the LCD monitor Common Recording Indications Q ia 2O 6X78 914094142 o F 10 45 10X W CD T TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF t p 44 Backlight Compensation Setting Backlight Compensation t p 35 Auto REC Recording Automatically by Sensing Movements AUTO REC t amp p 57 Tele Macro Taking Close up Shots t p 37 Scene Select Shooting According to Scene Subject p 32 WHITE BALANCE Setting White Balance t p 36 Time Clock Setting amp p 18 SMILE SHOT Capturing Smiles Automatically SMILE SHOT t p 45 Media REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO GZ EX355 p 242 REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE GZ EX355 ts p 242 Battery Indicator Checking the Remaining Recording Time t p 61 CONTINUOUS SHOOTING SHUTTER MODE Still Image p 231 Recording Mode Taking Videos in Auto Mode t p 24 Manual Recording t p 30 Setting Scenes of Intelligent Auto e Displays scenes detected automatically in the Intelligent Auto function Multiple scenes may be detected Scenes of Intelligent Auto t p 25 SILENT MODE Using the Silent Mode t p 26 Zoom ZOOM 1 p 228 Focus Ad
195. ess the dynamic DNS server for 1 year Create a QR code W Enter values in the required items for outdoor monitoring e Password set a password to connect this camera to the device via access point Not more than 8 characters e DDNS Set the connection environment to the internet Normally set to ON e User name DDNS set an user name for the obtained DDNS account e Password DDNS set a password for the obtained DDNS account UPnP Set to ON if the UPnP protocol may be used to connect the device to the network e HTTP Port Set the port number for connecting to the internet Normally set to 80 Display the screen for reading the QR code I Tap MENU Operation on this camera HL Rec menu The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera yay TOP MENU mS CX Ei 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera a rid a 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 5 Tap SET FROM QR CODE COMMON Wi Fi SETTING SET FROM QR CODE Tap EXECUTE On SET FROM QR CODE Wi Fi SETTING CAN BE SET USING WEB USER GUIDE OR SMART USER GUIDE EXECUTE STOP Read a QR code Read a QR code Operation on this camera PLEASE READ QR CODE 207 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 2 Tap YES SET FROM QR CODE CHANGE
196. ess to the camera Changing the HTTP Port DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING n p 156 Configures various settings related to OUTDOOR MONITORING e PASSWORD Default O000 Selects the password to access the camera Setting the Password DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING n p 155 UPnP Default ON Sets the UPnP of the camera OFF Disables UPnP ON Enables UPnP Setting the UPnP of this Camera OUTDOOR MONITORING amp p 157 e DDNS SETTING Configures various settings related to DDNS Setting Dynamic DNS on this Camera OUTDOOR MONITORING p 158 HTTP PORT Default 80 Changes the port number to access to the camera Changing the HTTP Port DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING c p 156 Configures various settings related to notification mails e DETECT MAIL ATTN Selects the recipient s e mail address for Detect Mail Sending Still Images via E mail upon Detection of Face or Movement DETECT MAIL t p 142 e MAIL SETTING Sets the e mail addresses of the sender and recipient Setting the Sender s E mail Address of the Camera t p 159 Registering the Recipient s E mail Address of the Camera t p 161 e DETECTION METHOD Default MOTION DETECTION Sets the detection method to start recording e MOTION DETECTION Starts recording upon detection of subject s movement
197. etected This item is only displayed when TOUCH PRIORITY AE AP is set to FACE TRACKING Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF t p 44 The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions I Open the LCD monitor Set the recording mode to either vi video or still image To switch the mode between video and still image tap sil or Cl on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap sii or to switch the mode to video or still image respectively You can also use the sl l button on this unit 2 Tap MENU CN N ST END 3 Tap RECORD SETTING Go to step 4 Alternatively tap SMILE NAME DISPLAY in the shortcut menu Go to step 5 ya TOP MENU 4 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen RECORD SETTING ca 5 Tap SMILE NAME DISPLAY ving RECORD SETTING Ea HBE iah OFF gt a O Ka 50 6 Tap the desired setting e OFF v Displays only the frames when faces are detected Displays the frames names and smile levels when faces are detected e Frame Appears around detected faces Name Appears for faces that are registered Smile level Appears in value 0 100 for detected smiles SHEET Pe SME Memo The camera is able to detect up to 16 faces Smile levels will be displayed for up to 3 of the largest faces displayed on the screen e Some faces may not be
198. ever to be performed Camera shake that often occurs when using the zoom lever can be minimized Zooming p 30 Playback Mode Switches to the playback mode ka Snapshot Functions as the SNAPSHOT button oO halfway However focus cannot be set by pressing Displays the various menus of still image recording Operating the Menu t p 224 Display ButtonD Switches the display between full DP and simple D with every tap of the button Simple display Some displays disappear after approximately 3 seconds e Full display Displays everything The display button changes from D to D When the power is turned off simple display D will be set Recording Mode Switches the recording mode i AM Using the Silent Mode When the Silent mode is used the LCD monitor darkens and operation sounds will not be output Use this mode to record quietly in dark places such as during a performance Press and hold the SILENT button to turn on the Silent mode The Silent mode can be cancelled by holding down the button again e appears when SILENT MODE is set to ON Useful Settings for Recording When QUICK RESTART is set to ON this unit turns on immediately if you open the LCD monitor within 5 minutes after the power is turned off by closing the monitor QUICK RESTART t amp p 239 When AUTO POWER OFF is set to ON this unit turns itself
199. f TOUCH PRIORITY AE AP By default it is set to FACE TRACKING Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF t p 44 Time Displays the current time Clock Setting p 18 Recording media Displays the icon of the media where still images are recorded to The recording media can be changed REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE GZ EX355 r p 242 Battery Indicator Displays the approximate remaining battery power during use Checking the Remaining Recording Time p 61 Recording Mode Displays the current recording mode of A Intelligent Auto or M Manual D Setting Scenes of Intelligent Auto Displays scenes detected automatically in the Intelligent Auto function Multiple scenes may be detected Remaining Number of Shots Displays the remaining number of shots for still image recording Approximate Number of Still Images Unit Number of Shots amp amp p 62 Recording in PHOTO appears when a still image is being Progress captured Lights up in green when focused Shutter Speed Displays the shutter speed 28 E Scenes of Intelligent Auto Captures one s skin beautifully Allows people to be captured naturally Record a group of people with the most suitable settings Record the smiling face clearly Records while focusing on a near object Focuses at a far distance and captures a sharp image with vivid colors Records in da
200. from a Smartphone or Computer Mi Smartphone Android iPhone Memo Prior to use this function a smartphone application needs to be installed on the smartphone Installing Smartphone Applications p 175 Start Everio sync 2 on the smartphone after setting DIRECT MONITORING 2 Tap DIRECT MONITORING a m mm mm m DIRECT MONITORING CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME SCORING FUNCTION INDOOR MONITORING r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT OUTDOOR MONITORING Tafi CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS Demo P E 3 The recording screen is displayed Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 HPAUSE il oF Tele Rec snapshot Wide Pause E Marking Game Score m e How to operate from a smartphone Using Smartphone Applications t p 175 E Computer Windows 7 Tap the URL button shown on the camera s screen displayed when the computer and the camera are connected wirelessly The URL for the computer to connect to appears 2 Checkthe URL being displayed on the camera screen which starts from http CAMERA NETWORK INFO URL LAN http eee te ene e After checking the URL tap QUIT to return to the previous screen 3 Start Internet Explorer web browser on the computer and enter the URL W rcows Interret Lxp corer
201. g RECORDABLE MANAGEMENT CAPACITY LEVEL HAS BEEN REACHED 1 Move the files or folders to a computer or other device Back up your files 2 Select FILE MANAGEMENT NO in FORMAT BUILT IN MEM or FORMAT SD CARD of the media settings menu All data on the built in memory or SD card will be deleted FORMAT BUILT IN MEM GZ EX355 t p 242 FORMAT SD CARD t p 242 SCENE QUANTITY EXCEEDED LIMIT 1 Move the files or folders to a computer or other device Back up your files 2 Select FILE MANAGEMENT NO in FORMAT BUILT IN MEM or FORMAT SD CARD of the media settings menu All data on the built in memory or SD card will be deleted FORMAT BUILT IN MEM GZ EX355 t p 242 FORMAT SD CARD t amp p 242 NUMBER OF FOLDERS OVERFLOW 1 Move the files or folders to a computer or other device Back up your files 2 Select FILE MANAGEMENT NO in FORMAT BUILT IN MEM or FORMAT SD CARD of the media settings menu All data on the built in memory or SD card will be deleted FORMAT BUILT IN MEM GZ EX355 t p 242 FORMAT SD CARD t amp p 242 FILE QUANTITY LIMIT EXCEEDED 1 Move the files or folders to a computer or other device Back up your files 2 Select FILE MANAGEMENT NO in FORMAT BUILT IN MEM or FORMAT SD CARD of the media settings menu All data on the built in memory or SD c
202. g other USB devices such as DVD writer external Blu ray drive or another USB external hard disk drive e Avoid the following operations during copying and playing back Turning off the unit or the USB external hard disk drive Disconnecting the USB cable Do not format the USB external hard disk drive using the PC If you did format again using this unit All the data in the USB external hard disk drive will be erased e Avoid the following operations using the PC Deleting files or folders in the USB external hard disk drive Moving files or folders in the USB external hard disk drive Changing the name of files or folders in the USB external hard disk drive These operations make the data impossible to be played back on this unit When you use the PC to edit the data in the USB external hard disk drive copy the data to the PC before editing Editing the data in the USB external hard disk drive directly from the PC makes the data impossible to be played back on this unit e Videos in iFrame format cannot be backed up Copying Preparing a USB External Hard Disk Drive Memo e When connecting to the external hard disk drive use a USB cable indicated below The USB cable provided with this unit cannot be used To use the USB cable provided with the USB external hard disk drive purchase the following USB conversion cable Part number QAM0852 001 Mini A Male A Female Consult your nearest se
203. he camera Changing the HTTP Port DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING t p 155 e Try again after powering off and on the camera and the terminal Smartphone or computer Video or audio is interrupted or delayed f the network speed is slow videos and audio sound may be interrupted or delay may become significant e For web browser Lagging may become significant due to the performance of the computer If the stream format is set to Full HD change to SD or Motion JPEG and try again Wi Fi Specifications t p 196 e For web browser If lagging is severe reload the screen regularly e For smartphone Try to change the place and time to locate an environment with good signal strength The unit turns off automatically To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage Unable to set focus When not monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera is fixed e Even when monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera will be fixed if not operated for more than 3 hours Focus works again when the camera is operated Connection gets disconnected ora Establish connection again at a place with good signal strength Transmission speed may drop or UNABLE TO CONNECT message is connection may fail if the devices are placed too far away from each other wh
204. he HTTP Port DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING t p 155 194 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 E mail Notification Mail Video Mail we Unable to send e mails e Check that the settings of the e mail server are correct Check that the settings of the sender s e mail address are correct Check that the username and password are correct e f you are using an e mail service that is not from your provider it may be necessary to change the SMTP settings e Some free e mail services from web browsers or e mail softwares SMTP may have default SMTP settings that do not allow e mails to be sent Change the SMTP settings to allow sending of e mails before use Sent e mails are not received Check whether notifications indicating errors have been sent to the sender s e mail address Make use of a computer or similar devices as it is not possible to check from the camera If no notifications are received Refer to Unable to send e mails and adjust the settings accordingly If notifications are received Check the content of the notification Note Do not continue sending e mails with the same settings if you receive error notifications Depending on the provider you may be marked as a sender of spam junk mail Unable to attach images to e mails Depending on the provider some attached files may be deleted Make use of other free e mail services The unit turns off automatically
205. he camera Registering the MAC Address TV MONITORING t p 171 COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Configures various settings related to the network e ACCESS POINTS Adds deletes or perform LAN settings of access points wireless LAN router Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS t p 164 e MAIL SETTING Sets the e mail addresses of the sender and recipient Setting the Sender s E mail Address of the Camera t p 159 Registering the Recipient s E mail Address of the Camera t p 161 e MAC ADDRESS Media Access Control address Displays the MAC address of the camera The above shows the MAC address when connected to an access point while the below shows the address during direct connection Checking the MAC Address of this Camera t p 171 e SET FROM QR CODE Perform the Wi Fi setting after the camera reads the QR code generated by following the instruction in Detailed User Guide Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 t p 198 LOCK SETTINGS Sets a password to prevent others from seeing the network settings Protecting the Network Settings with a Password t p 172 e INITIALIZATION Returns the network settings to their default values Initializing the Wi Fi Settings t p 173 154 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Setting the Password DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING Sets the passwor
206. he face information that is registered The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions l Tap MENU 3 Tap FACE REGISTRATION res SETUP FACE REGISTRATION C lt PLAY ii Rec menu The top menu appears 2 Tap SETUP yay TOP MENU Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 4 Tap EDIT FACE REGISTRATION REGISTER NEW FACE 3 Tap FACE REGISTRATION CANCEL SETUP FACE REGISTRATION 5 Tap the person to edit TOUCH PERSON TO EDIT A te a 7 7 oat E ER a2 eo JOHN MIKE KEN e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 57 Recording 4 Tap CANCEL FACE REGISTRATION REGISTER NEW FACE EDIT CANCEL 5 Tap the person to cancel registration of TOUCH PERSON TO CANCEL A U8 cat t JOHN Mike KEN e appears on the selected person To remove froma person tap on the person again 6 Tap SET TOUCH PERSON TO CANCEL oe LR O Ro KEN 7 Tap YES CANCEL SELECTED PERSON e Tap YES to delete the face information of the selected person e Tap NO to return to the previous screen Tap OK when the deletion complete screen appears 52 Reducing Camera Shake When the image stabilizer is set camera shake during video recording can be effectively reduced Openthe LCD monitor Deactivates image stabilize
207. he menu e Tap to return to the previous screen The provided software LoiLoFit for Everio starts up on the computer The subsequent operations are to be performed on the computer 6 Select the files to back up 116 Click Select all to select all the files at once 7 After selecting click Next W hent imi Leh 10279 WET Cet Meets koa ved gt MAA a Po brit Gace noo alae hied ba bol cds pol ar Wel te bo 8 Click Yes to start backup lhe selected Wea wll he hackeri Hp lark ip ie Deore h Klg i Back Up File Sie Used Space ANAHE Space 272 GB f 298 GB Backup starts The tab on the right side becomes blank when the backup is completed E hant imta T03 WT CoE Weti kaa vd Ba amp B et petite Po brnir Bacon no ale heh bia bol cds Bol ae We te bk oO Memo e Videos recorded in the iFrame format can not be copied Before making backup load the SD card in which the videos and still images are stored on this unit e After backing up your files using the provided software they cannot be restored to this unit e Delete unwanted videos before making backup It takes time to back up many videos Deleting Unwanted Files t p 80 Copying Disconnecting this Unit from Computer Recording Videos to Discs I Click Safely Remove Hardware and Eject Media I Insert a new disc into the PC s recordable DVD or Blu ray
208. he smartphone applications transferred to the smartphone 1280x720 or i i 640x360 M Common for Android and iOS Available for videos in AVCHD format only I Tap GAME SCORE Enter the recording methods of the game SETTING score as well as the team information oniter Game Score Settings t p 186 TEPAUSE mi Enter the URL of the camera that is connected to the smartphone via wireless network HTTP Set the user name and the password for AUTHORIZATION INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING The default username is everio fixed and the password is 0000 can be changed from camera CHANGE Select the background BACKGROUND COLOR NOT TO SLEEP MODE Set to prevent the smartphone from entering into the sleep mode while the application is in use Enter a check mark to disactivate the sleep mode HELP Displays the help file Barking Game Score W LICENSE Displays the license agreement of the AGREEMENT software Android only 2 Tap the desired setting Memo When connecting to INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING MONITOR you will be prompted to enter the URL or HTTP authorization if they are not entered or entered incorrectly MONITORING DISPLAY THE MONITOR SCREEN Game Score Settings Enter the recording methods of the game score as well as the team information E Common for Android and iOS LOC INFO TRANS INT GPS SENDS LOCATION INFORMATION 155EC Tap TO THE CAMERA
209. heck the file After checking tap 5 7 After selecting all the files tap SAVE SELECT FROM SCENES MS A 7 on 8 Tap EXECUTE SELECT FROM SCENES REQUIRED DISC SPACE DVD 2 DVD DL 1 PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed Prepare the discs accordingly 9 Tap AUTO or BY DATE ii mode only SELECT FROM SCENES CREATE HEADLINES ON THE TOP MENU SELECT THE SORT METHOD AUTO BY DATE e When AUTO is selected videos with similar recording dates are displayed in groups e When BY DATE is selected videos are displayed according to recording dates 10 Tap EXECUTE SELECT FROM SCENES REMAINING DVD 02 DVD DL 1 EXECUTE STOP When INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO EXIT appears change the disc 11 Tap OK when COMPLETED is displayed SELECT FROM SCENES COMPLETED 12 Press and hold the 9 button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit and disconnect the USB cable Caution e Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is complete e Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied Special files cannot be copied either e All DVDs will be finalized automatically While files cannot be added to the DVD R DVD RW later files can still be added to the BD R BD RE DVDs that are created in DVD AVCHD format are
210. hod of connection contact your TV s manufacturer e AV cable P N QAM1322 001 Wiring specifications for video audio of the 4 pole mini plug are described in the following For purchasing consult your nearest JVC service center t Video yellow Grounding wire Audio Rch red Audio Lch white Playing Back a DVD or Blu ray Disc Created on this Unit DVDs or Blu ray discs created using the backup function on this unit can be played back on TV using an optional DVD writer DVDs only with playback function CU VD50 or a normal DVD or Blu ray disc player DVDs can also be played back on this unit by connecting the optional DVD writer with playback function Playing Back with a DVD Writer 1 p 105 Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 98 e For details on how to play back on a normal DVD or Blu ray disc player refer to the instruction manual of the player Playback Device DVD Blu ray Disc AVCHD format DVD writer connected to this unit BD writer external Blu ray v drive connected to this unit DVD player DVD Recorder a ef Only for AVCHD compatible devices Blu ray player Blu ray Recorder DVD writer with playback function CU VD50 Caution DVDs that are created in AVCHD format cannot be played back on DVD players with standard quality You may not be able to remove the disc from the player Digest Playback on a Blu ray or DVD Player You can
211. hone application needs to be installed on the smartphone Installing Smartphone Applications p 175 Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt lt PLAY The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera HL Rec menu ya TOP MENU v C R P 3 Tap OUTDOOR MONITORING 127 Operation on this camera AN Ss fs oS amp 4 Tap START mp Operation on this camera OUTDOOR MONITORING 5 Start making a connection Operation on this camera OUTDOOR MONITORING CONNECTING ROI Diag aaichderbanccabn aa Name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router in connection is displayed 6 The following is displayed when the camera is connected to the access point Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 e The URL WAN for the smartphone to connect to appears Does not appear if DDNS is not set or set incorrectly e XUPnP is displayed when UPnP cannot be used 7 Check the URL WAN CAMERA NETWORK INFO USE THE URL BELOW TO CONNECT FROM AN OUTSIDE LOCATION URL WAN http e After checking the URL tap QUIT to return to the previous screen e XUPnP is displayed when UPnP cannot be used Mi Operation on the smartphone Start Everio sync 2 on the smartphone after setting OUTDOOR MONITORING Tap START in OUTDOOR MONITORING on the c
212. ilar colors are detected In this case tap the subject again The targeted subject color may also be tracked back again if it appears in the center of the screen within a specific time Caution e Subjects near the sides of the LCD monitor may not respond or be recognized when tapped In this case move the subject to the center and tap again e FACE TRACKING may not work properly depending on the shooting conditions distance angle brightness etc and the subject direction of face etc It is also particularly difficult to detect faces in backlight e PET TRACKING may not work properly depending on the type of pet shooting conditions distance angle brightness etc and the subject direction of face etc It is also particularly difficult to detect faces of pets that are totally black covered in long hair or in backlight e COLOR TRACKING may not function properly in the following cases when recording subjects with no contrast when recording subjects that are moving at high speed when recording in a dark place when the surrounding brightness changes e AREA SELECT is not available while the digital zoom is in use When FACE TRACKING is set the subject may be lost if the camera is moved vertically or horizontally very fast For unregistered faces they cannot be tracked back again To track back the subject tap on it again For registered faces focus and brightness will be adjust
213. ilizer are also not available To use digital zoom set ZOOM in the menu accordingly ZOOM s amp p 228 Mosaic type noise occurs when recording scenes with fast movements or extreme changes in brightness Set the VIDEO QUALITY to UXP or XP for recording VIDEO QUALITY t p 228 251 Troubleshooting Card Cannot insert the SD card Make sure not to insert the SD card in the wrong direction Inserting an SD Card amp p 13 Unable to copy to SD card Set REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE to SD card GZ EX355 REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO GZ EX355 t p 242 REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE GZ EX355 t p 242 To use SD cards that have been used on other devices it is necessary to format initialize the SD card using FORMAT SD CARD from media settings FORMAT SD CARD t p 242 252 Playback Sound or video is interrupted Sometimes playback is interrupted at the connecting section between two scenes This is not a malfunction There is no sound When the Silent mode is used operation and playback sounds will not be output Turn off the Silent mode Using the Silent Mode t p 26 Set OPERATION SOUND in the common menu to ON OPERATION SOUND t amp p 239 Audio sound is not recorded for videos taken in HIGH SPEED RECORDING TIME LAPSE RECORDING Slow motion High speed Recording t p 5
214. ill Images According to the Attraction You may choose to take videos all the time However you may want to take some still images too The following section explains the scenarios suitable for taking videos or still images Mi Scenarios suitable for taking videos Scenarios with changes in body movement are suitable for taking videos This includes situations where there are rapid changes in facial expressions or voices of surprise and delight Some amusement parks do not allow passengers to perform any recording Be sure to check beforehand Examples e Merry go round go kart coffee cup etc Mi Scenarios suitable for taking still images photos Scenarios with little movement of the subject are suitable for taking still images Try to take the still images from an angle such that the surroundings can be seen Clearly Examples e Carousal ferris wheel fun bicycle rides etc Inducing Responses by Calling Out Videos with no waving of hands nor laughter are not only dull when you view them later but also put the capability of the audio recording function of the camcorder to a waste When recording induce more reactions by enthusiastically waving your hands or shouting out Is it fun and the like Capturing the Best Moment in a Video as a Still Image Shots with the eyes closed are often taken by accident To reduce such mistakes make use of the function to capture still images from videos As videos ar
215. indows computer A wireless LAN that is compatible with WPA2 is necessary Settings Required in Advance Set up your camera and smartphone or computer by performing the following operations For a smartphone with WPS support refer to the Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS WPS is a method to connect the camera and the smartphone wirelessly by easy button operations Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Connecting the Smartphone to the Camera Wirelessly Connect the smartphone to the camera by either of the following methods DIRECT MONITORING SET UP Wi Fi SETTING ON E Connection by entering the Wi Fi password CONNECTING DEVICE See Se ee ee Tap MENU Operation on this camera Set the camera to the recording mode STOP WPS 6 Selectthe SSID in step 5 from the Wi Fi network selection screen of your smartphone and enter the PASS on the password screen Operation on the smartphone or computer PASS alec ada ahaa aad CN N ST END The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU e For details on connecting your smartphone or computer to a Wi Fi network please refer to the instruction manual of the phone terminal in use 7 A connection is established and appears on the camera s screen 3 Tap the DIRECT MONITORING sa icon in the Wi Fi menu Operation on this camera Wi Fi Mi Connection by Wi Fi Protected Setu
216. ing TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF OFF OFF _ SELECT oe ee TRACKING TRACKING FACE TRACKING PET TRACKING i S p ee a F EPA Ogle alld pre pr T i Focus and brightness will be adjusted automatically based on the tapped position face color area A blue frame appears around the selected subject face color while a white frame appears around the selected area e To reset tap the desired position face color area again e To cancel FACE TRACKING PET TRACKING or COLOR TRACKING tap the blue frame e To cancel AREA SELECT tap the white frame Deactivates the function Os appears on the screen Recording is performed while tracking and automatically adjusting the tapped face Subject with appropriate focus and brightness In addition a blue frame appears around the tapped face subject When the face of a person is registered it becomes the main subject and the blue frame appears even without specific selection PET amp appears on the screen Recording is performed while TRACKING tracking and automatically adjusting the face of the tapped pet subject with appropriate brightness In addition a blue frame appears around the tapped pet Subject COLOR TRACKING TRACKING appears on the screen Recording is performed while tracking and automatically adjusting the tapped color Subject with appropriate focus In addition a blue frame appears around the
217. ing is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Select the Manual recording mode em M O wen f the mode is A Intelligent Auto tap A on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap IM to switch the recording mode to Manual 2 Tap MENU C lt PLAY il Menu The top menu appears 3 Tap RECORD SETTING ya TOP MENU TA 4 Tap FOCUS gt RECORD SETTING x e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 5 Tap MANUAL va FOCUS AUTO MANUAL IS Recording 6 Adjust the focus Adjusting Brightness You can adjust the brightness to your preferred level The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions I Select the Manual recording mode lt KPLAY SET JJ REC MENU e Tap aA to focus on a distant subject If A eae blinking focus cannot be set any further e Tap amp to focus on a near subject lt PLAY i MENU If appears blinking focus cannot be set any nearer 7 Tap SET to confirm If the mode is A Intelligent Auto tap A on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap IM to switch the recording mode to Manual oN NE ORT en e When focus is confirmed the focusing frame disappears and A and are displayed 2 Tap MENU HL Rec menu The top menu appears
218. ing link for details Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS ACCESS POINTS POINTS r gt p 164 WE Regular Operation Connect this camera to a smartphone or computer I Tap MENU Operation on this camera 7 Tap SEARCH Operation on this camera 209 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Does not appear if DDNS is not set or set incorrectly e XUPnP is displayed when UPnP cannot be used 7 Check the URL WAN CAMERA NETWORK INFO USE THE URL BELOW TO CONNECT FROM AN OUTSIDE LOCATION GN TREC ST MeN e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon QUIT Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU e After checking the URL tap QUIT to return to the previous screen q i e XUPnP is displayed when UPnP cannot be used URL WAN http kK REE WE Operation on the smartphone Memo e Prior to use this function a smartphone application needs to be installed on the smartphone Installing Smartphone Applications p 175 3 Tap OUTDOOR MONITORING 121 Start Everio sync 2 on the smartphone after setting OUTDOOR Operation on this camera MONITORING Wi Fi a am 4 Tap START p Operation on this camera Tap START in OUTDOOR MONITORING on the camera to start 2 Tap OUTDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING os
219. ion JPEG format no conversion VIDEO MAIL MP4 compliant H 264 Baseline Profile 640x360 30p 196 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 AAC 48kHz 16 bits 2ch DETECT MAIL Still Image Transmission JPEG 640x360 197 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 DIRECT MONITORING You can monitor images being captured by Everio to your smartphone or PC While you are busy you can monitor your baby who is sleeping in the room next door INDOOR MONITORING Images being captured by Everio can be set to your PC or smartphone when your children return home via the wireless LAN router OUTDOOR MONITORING Images being captured by Everio can be sent to the grandparents PC or smartphone by the wireless LAN Wi Fi spot via the Internet DETECT MAIL When your child returns home while you are away a still image is sent to you by e mail VIDEO MAIL Let s send video messages Good morning Good night to your father or husband who is on the business trip TV MONITORING A DLNA compatible TV may be used to display and play back the images 198 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 DIRECT MONITORING Mi Setting Once setting is done start from the Regular Operation below Create a QR code W Enter values in the required items for direct monitoring Password set a password to connect this camera to the device by direct monitoring 8 to 63 characters 64 ch
220. iosptqeisneettonsteanainmssaiosase 72 PLAYBACK OTHER FILE wccneceienecrestassanacetcodawnesboncceiennnesens 73 Playing Back Still Images senncsinvesisisestennniasnavdansuthieveatinbdtaceeeenee 74 Slideshow Playback ccccssseecceeeseececeeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeeess 75 Searching for a Specific Video Still Image by Date 76 Connecting to and Viewing ON TV cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 77 Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector sssseesssseeeeneesees if Connecting via the AV Connector cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 79 Playing Back a DVD or Blu ray Disc Created on this Unit 79 Digest Playback on a Blu ray or DVD Player 00 79 Editing Deleting Unwanted Files cccescsseeeeceeseeeeeeesereeseneeeeenans 80 Deleting the Currently Displayed File ccceeesseeeees 80 Deleting Selected Files ec ceseeseeeeeeceesseeeeeeeesaneeeeees 80 Protecting Files yicccsetcasanttvavicsnnasinacneseeseecncnrsaancwseaioacsarenqeeneareass 81 Protecting Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed FIO a a nee eee eee Protecting Releasing Protection of Selected Files 82 Capturing a Still Image in the Video During Playback 83 Combining Videos Recorded by Seamless Recording 83 Capturing a Required Part in the Video TRIMMING 84 Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos 02 cccse08s 85 Creating Playlists
221. ired stamp to use The number indicates the size of the stamp Check if the recording mode is pil f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si to switch the recording mode You can also use the ili IO button on this unit 2 Tap MENU DEA a 8 oe J 9 Tap to scroll through the list of stamps Tap m1 to change the size of stamps Tap to return to the previous screen lt lt PLAY il C MENU 7 Tapon ne screen to add a stamp The top menu appears 3 Tap SPECIAL RECORDING ya TOP MENU 9 8 WP 0 00 00 0 53 Au X Tap u and the YES button to delete the stamp Tap ON OFF to display hide the stamps e Press the START STOP button the camera to start recording Press again to stop 4 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Tap X to exit STAMP SPECIAL RECORDING To perform operations other than recording tap X to cancel the STAMP first HI adore P m le m emo Up to 50 stamps may be added ee di OP The added stamps are deleted when the stamp mode ends or when power is turned off 5 Tap STAMP SPECIAL RECORDING e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 42 Recording Recording with Personal Handwriting HANDWRITING 6 Selecta line EFFECT F Records videos with your personal handwriting
222. ireless LAN router have never been changed from their default values check the following Check whether an adhesive label indicating the initial settings is attached to the body of the access point wireless LAN router Check for the default settings in the instruction manual of the access point wireless LAN router Refer to the instruction manual of the access point wireless LAN router in use Simple connection methods other than WPS are not supported Conduct a search for the access point to connect e Turn off the power of the camera then try again 191 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 INDOOR MONITORING connection at home e Unable to connect to camera Check whether the Wi Fi connection is established successfully URL required Check to ensure that the camera and the terminal smartphone or computer are connected to the same access point e Try again after powering off and on the camera and the terminal Smartphone or computer Unsure of URL to access from a web After INDOOR MONITORING is started tap CAMERA NETWORK INFO shown on the camera s screen browser Enter the address as shown in URL LAN into the web browser to access it No image and sound when accessing from a e If you have installed third party video players images and sounds may not be played back properly WED DIOWSE e f the stream format is set to Motion JPEG when transferring to the web browser no so
223. justing Focus Manually t p 33 Brightness Adjusting Brightness t p 34 Video Recording 0 12 34 010 00 loo N Video Mode Interior t p 245 Video Quality VIDEO QUALITY p 228 TIME LAPSE RECORDING 1SEC Recording at Intervals TIME LAPSE RECORDING t p 54 Image Stabilizer Reducing Camera Shake t p 52 Seamless Recording GZ EX355 SEAMLESS RECORDING GZ EX355 t amp p 227 Wind Cut WIND CUT p 227 Time Lapse Recording Counter Recording at Intervals TIME LAPSE RECORDING t p 54 Remaining Recording Time Checking the Remaining Recording Time t p 61 Scene Counter 247 Indications on the LCD monitor Still Image Recording a 9999 aa Still Image Mode Interior t p 245 Image Size IMAGE SIZE re p 232 Self Timer Taking Group Shots Self timer t p 58 Remaining Number of Shots Checking the Remaining Recording Time t p 62 Focus Recording in Progress 248 E cj T e 85888 10 00 ED 42 00 01 23 amm y 0 12 34 1SEC 11 no 4 OSOSAN MENU Video Mode Interior p 245 Video Quality VIDEO QUALITY amp p 228 Operation Indicator Operation Buttons for Video Playback t p 64 Date Time e Displays the recording date and time Media FORMAT BUILT IN MEM GZ
224. king frames of it at a certain TIME LAPSE Pts ore interval as Gp This is useful for making observations such as the opening of a flower bud The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Openthe LCD monitor 5 Tap ON ris HIGH SPEED RECORDING Check if the recording mode is pili f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si to switch the mode to video You can also use the W O button on this unit 2 Tap MENU e When ON is tapped 300 frames can be recorded in 1 second e To cancel high speed recording tap OFF 6 Start recording CN REC ST MENU The top menu appears 3 Tap SPECIAL RECORDING Press the START STOP button again to stop recording Settings of high speed recording are not saved when the power is ya TOP MENU turned off 5 Memo F This function does not support the iFrame recording format Images may appear grainier than other videos The image displayed on the LCD monitor during recording may also appear grainier e Audio sound is not recorded together with the video When high speed recording is enabled only the optical zoom can be used During high speed recording TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF is setto OFF 4 Tap TIME LAPSE RECORDING In addition as image stabilizer is set to OFP it is recommended that a SPECIAL RECORDI
225. l image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap vii to switch the mode to video You can also use the sifi IOl button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode lt PLAY 3 Tap MENU Cj g i i T E 4 Tap EDIT Ii Rec Menu 88 6 Tap EDIT ax EDIT PLAYLIST NEW LIST EDIT 7 Tap on the playlist to edit and tap NEXT pag EDIT PLAYLIST NEXT e X 8 Tap on the video upper row to arrange in the playlist pak EDIT 0 999 i AR msg C TOTAL DVD 01 00h00m DVD DL 1 Ths SAVE appears on the selected video Tap to deselect Tap on the selected video again to check the video After checking tap gt e Tap lt gt or move the zoom lever to display the previous next video e indicates the size of the video 9 Tap ADD and insert the video image See ws 0 999 ABI img TOTAL DVD 01 00h00m DVD DL 1 E m he i SAVE e Repeat steps 8 9 and arrange the videos in the playlist e To change the position of a video in the playlist lower row select the insertion point with lt after step 8 and tap ADD appears when the inserted video is selected Tap to deselect Tap on the selected video again to check the video After checking tap To delete of a video in the playlist lower row tap the video the
226. laylist Editing Playlists t p 88 Deleting Playlists t p 89 Memo e When a video file is deleted or moved the same file will be removed from the playlist Videos recorded in the iFrame format can not be selected when creating a playlist Creating Playlists with Selected Files Create a playlist by arranging the files one by one e The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory I Open the LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is pili f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap sii to switch the mode to video You can also use the sili IOl button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode lt lt PLAY 3 Tap MENU Ii Rec MENU 85 Editing 4 Tap EDIT O O CE EDIT PLAYLIST 6 Tap NEW LIST eg EDIT PLAYLIST NEW LIST EDIT DELETE 7 Tap CREATE FROM SCENE pig EDIT PLAYLIST CREATE FROM SCENE CREATE BY DATE 8 Tap on the video to add to playlist Wai FROM SCENE 0 999 S A ime TOTAL 00h00m appears on the selected video Tap to deselect Tap on the selected video again to check the video After checking tap 3 Tap lt gt or move the zoom lever to display the previous next video e indicates the size of the video 86 9 Tap ADD and insert the video image
227. less LAN router Connect the camera to the access point by either of the following methods 6 Tap ADD Mi Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Registration Operation on this camera Follow the operations below if the access point wireless LAN router in use supports WPS I Tap MENU Operation on this camera ACCESS POINTS 7 Tap EZ REGISTRATION WPS Operation on this camera lt r L menu e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU 8 Activate WPS of the access point wireless LAN router within 2 minutes e To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 9 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera 3 Tap gt onthe lower right of the screen Operation on this camera REGISTERED FETTER ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 Wi Fi a am na WE Search the access point and select from the list Set the name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router and the password beforehand 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera Tap MENU Operation on this camera CN REC ST MENU 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS e The top menu appears Operation on this camera p pp 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera 136 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 ya TOP MENU 3 Tap gt on the
228. lower right of the screen Operation on this camera a rid 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS as 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera ACCESS POINTS 7 Tap SEARCH Operation on this camera e The search results appear on the camera s screen e UNABLE TO FIND THE ACCESS POINT message appears if there is no access point in the surrounding area 8 Tap the name SSID of the desired access point from the list of search results Operation on this camera SEARCH ee SEARCH AGAIN 9 Register a password Operation on this camera PASSWORD ran o un e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice or C by tapping 3 times e Tap DELETE to delete a character e Tap CANCEL to exit Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number e Tap amp or gt to move one space to the left or right The password is not required if the wireless LAN router is not security protected A a 1 CANCEL 10 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera REGISTERED ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 e Other metho
229. m using supplied battery pack BN VG107U Approx 2 h 30 m using supplied battery pack BN VG114U e The charging time is when the unit is used at 25 C 77 F If the battery pack is charged outside the room temperature range of 10 C to 35 C 50 F to 95 F charging may take a longer time or it may not start CHARGE lamp blinks 2 times in a slow cycle for notification if the battery charge does not start Also please note that the recordable and playable time may also be shortened under some usage conditions such as at low temperature e f malfunctions overvoltage etc occur or if any battery manufactured other than JVC is attempted for battery charge charging stops In these cases the CHARGE lamp blinks quickly for notification Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter f you use any other AC adapters besides the supplied AC adapter malfunctions may occur e You can record or play back videos while the AC adapter is connected Battery charging cannot be performed during recording or playback Remove the battery when the unit is to be used for a long time Performance of the battery may drop if it is left attached to the unit 12 Rechargeable Batteries e When using the battery in a low temperature environment 10 C 50 F or below the operating time may be shortened or it may not function properly When using this unit outdoors in the winter weather warm the battery such as by placing it in the pocket befor
230. m the Wi Fi network selection screen of your smartphone and enter the PASS on the password screen Operation on the smartphone or computer CN REC ST MENU The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ya TOP MENU e For details on connecting your smartphone or computer to a Wi Fi network please refer to the instruction manual of the phone terminal in use 7 A connection is established and appears on the camera s screen 3 Tap the DIRECT MONITORING sa icon in the Wi Fi menu Operation on this camera Pr Gie E Connection by Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS 1 Tap MENU Operation on this camera Set the camera to the recording mode 4 Tap START p Operation on this camera DIRECT MONITORING mm Co a The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera When iFrame is selected for VIDEO REC FORMAT the following display appears and recording mode is switched to the 60i mode in AVCHD S TOP MENU This display disappears automatically after approximately 3 seconds but disappears immediately if the screen is tapped DIRECT MONITORING SON 3 Tap the DIRECT MONITORING asa icon in the Wi Fi menu Operation on this camera Wi Fi 5 Check the SSID and the PASS being displayed on the screen of the camera DIRECT MONITORING SET UP Wi Fi SETTING ON CONNEC
231. matically Files cannot be added to the DVD R DVD RW later Memo 103 Copying Copying Selected Files Select and copy the desired videos or still images individually The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Select video or still image mode 2 Tap SELECT AND CREATE video or SELECT AND SAVE still image ad VIDEO BACKUP CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE PLAYBACK e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode Tap sil to switch between the video and still image modes 3 Tap the media you would like to make a backup amp SELECT AND CREATE SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP BUILT IN MEMORY T SDCARD 4 Tap SELECT FROM SCENES video or SELECT FROM IMAGES still image viet SELECT AND CREATE CREATE BY DATE CREATE BY PLAYLIST SELECT FROM SCENES While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode 5 Tap on the videos or still images to copy vial SELECT FROM SCENES BESS we oe Bo I 9 ae as a gy M V appears on the selected files To remove v from a file tap on the file again Tap CHECK to check the file After checking tap 5 While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode 6 After selecting all the files tap SAVE SELECT FROM SCENES oR Ba m
232. mp p 105 102 Copying Selected Playlists Arrange and copy the created playlists in the order you like The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory I Select video mode 2 Tap SELECT AND CREATE Ci VIDEO BACKUP CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE PLAYBACK 3 Tap the media you would like to make a backup SELECT AND CREATE SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP 4 Tap CREATE BY PLAYLIST yy SELECT AND CREATE CREATE BY DATE CREATE BY PLAYLIST SELECT FROM SCENES 5 Tap on the playlist to copy to disc pit CREATE BY PLAYLIST 0 999 A prey TOTAL 00h00m e appears on the selected playlist upper row Tap to deselect Tap on the selected playlist again to check the content of the playlist After checking tap 5 Tap lt gt or move the zoom lever to display the previous next playlist 6 Tap ADD to insert a playlist She ws 0 999 TE AB mm TOTAL 00h00m ADD QUIT he Repeat steps 5 6 and arrange the playlists To change the position of a playlist lower row select the insertion point with lt after step 5 and tap ADD e appears when the inserted playlist is selected Tap to deselect e Tap on the selected playlist again to check the content of the playlist After checking tap 5 Copying To delete of a video in the playlist lower row tap the video then tap e A list of playlis
233. mputer the focus of the camera is fixed e Even when monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera will be fixed if not operated for more than 3 hours Focus works again when the camera is operated Connection gets disconnected ora Establish connection again at a place with good signal strength Transmission speed may drop or UNABLE TO CONNECT message is connection may fail if the devices are placed too far away from each other when there are objects in displayed between or when microwave ovens or other wireless devices are in use e f connection cannot be established again restart the terminal smartphone or computer Screen does not refresh or remains black e Check if the camera and the access point are properly connected Images cannot be detected on the terminal smartphone or computer if the camera is disconnected from the access point halfway through 192 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 OUTDOOR MONITORING connection from the Internet we Unsure of URL to access from a web e After OUTDOOR MONITORING is started tap CAMERA NETWORK INFO shown on the camera s browser screen Enter the address as shown in URL WAN into the web browser to access it The URL WAN does not appear in the The URL WAN will not appear if dynamic DNS is not set on the camera network information To set dynamic DNS perform the following steps 1 Obtain an account with JVC dynamic DNS s
234. mum Recording Time BN VG114U 1h5m 2h Supplied E GZ E300 Battery Pack Actual recording time Continuous recording time Maximum Recording Time BN VG107U 40m 1h5m Supplied BN VG114U 1h15m 2h10m BN VG1i21U 1h55m 3h15m BN VG1i38U 3h20m 5h45m e The above are values when MONITOR BRIGHTNESS is set to 3 standard e The actual recording time is an estimate in case that such operations as zooming is used or recording is stopped repeatedly It may be shorter in the actual usage It is recommended to prepare battery packs ready for three times the expected recording time When the battery life is reached the recording time becomes shorter even if the battery pack is fully charged Replace the battery pack with a new one 23 Recording Indications During Video Recording Taking Videos in Auto Mode You can record without worrying about the setting details by using the Intelligent Auto mode Settings such as exposure and focus will be adjusted automatically to suit the shooting conditions e In case of specific shooting scenes such as person etc its icon is displayed on the screen e Before recording an important scene it is recommended to conduct a trial recording 0 00 00 2 04 ICE mf menu Video Quality Displays the icon of the VIDEO QUALITY setting selected in the recording menu VIDEO QUALITY t p 228 TOUCH PRIORITY Displays
235. n from the U S government may be required when bringing the unit to an export controlled country set by the U S government such as Cuba Iraq North Korea Iran Rwanda and Syria As of December 2012 For more information consult the U S Embassy Commercial Service 132 Image Monitoring via Direct Connection DIRECT MONITORING You can check the image on the camera via direct connection Wi Fi Direct with a smartphone or computer without the need for an access point wireless LAN router e Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring qd ne bfi a Caution This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage e When not monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera is fixed Even when monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera will be fixed if not operated for more than 3 hours Focus works again when the camera is operated You may have difficulty establishing a connection via direct monitoring in an environment where the camera is placed away from the smartphone or computer In this case connect using the access point wireless LAN router Image Monitoring via an Access Point at Home INDOOR MONITORING t p 135 What You Need e Smartphone or W
236. n is displayed on the smartphone 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen e TEPAUSE mi Operation on this camera Wi Fi 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera y iela Pal se BMarking Game Score W 2 Tap PAN OPERATION SPEED 5 Tap INITIALIZATION Se we Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING LOCK SETTINGS INITIALIZATION 6 Tap YES Operation on this camera 173 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 MONITOR MONITORING DISPLAY THE MONITOR SCREEN PAN OPERATION SPEED gt SET THE OPERATION SPEED Q LOC INFO TRANS INT GPS SENDS LOCATION INFORMATION 155EC TO THE CAMERA WHEN USING DIRECT MONITORING VIDEO TRANSFER AVCHD Index LENGTH RESOLUTION pixel GAME SCORE GAME SCORE SETTING 3 Tap HIGH SPEED or LOW SPEED PAN OPERATION SPEED HIGH SPEED LOW SPEED 174 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Using Smartphone Applications e By installing the Everio sync 2 smartphone software images on the camera can be checked from a distance and recording videos still images and zooming operation can be performed e You can also send images recorded by the camera to the smartphone via Wi Fi to enjoy the recorded images on your smartphone or tablet Installing Smartphone Applications WE Android Smartphone Tap Play store on the application list 2 Search for the Everio sync
237. n tap CANCEL e indicates the size of the video Editing 10 After arranging tap SAVE pik EDIT 0 999 EE AL meg TOTAL sm DVD 01 00h00m DVD DL 1 E ia 17 Tap YES QUIT PLAYLIST SAVE EDITED CONTENTS Memo e Tap X on each screen to exit the menu Deleting Playlists Delete the playlists that you have created The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Check if the recording mode is pili f the mode is still image tap A on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap vii to switch the mode to video You can also use the sili IOl button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode 4 Tap EDIT O 89 Copying 6 Tap DELETE eg EDIT PLAYLIST NEW LIST EDIT Seer 7 Tap on the playlist to delete and tap NEXT yay DELETE DELETE ALL G2 TOTO 2OT a TFS sae ses anes see a CRE e All created playlists will be deleted when DELETE ALL is selected 8 Tap YES to confirm the deletion DELETE PLAYLIST e After deleting tap OK e After deleting is complete the screen returns to the delete playlist selection screen Memo e Tap X on each screen to exit the menu 90 Creating Discs with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive The JVC external Blu ray drive is known as BD writer You can copy the re
238. n this example the original number 1 becomes number 2 and the orignal number 2 becomes number 3 When REG is tapped the registration complete screen appears e Tap OK to complete the registration e You can edit registered face information in EDIT Editing the Registered Face Information t p 51 Memo Faces may not be registered correctly in the following cases when the face appears either too small or too large compared to the frame when it is too dark or too bright when the face appears horizontal or slanted when a part of the face is hidden when there are multiple faces within the frame To increase the accuracy of face recognition fit only one face within the frame and register in a bright environment Faces may not be recognized correctly depending on the shooting conditions and environment In this case register the face again Faces may not be recognized correctly during recording if the face recognition level is low In this case register the face again Face tracking and name display may not work properly depending on the registered faces shooting conditions distance angle brightness etc and expressions Face tracking and name display may not work properly for people with similar facial features such as siblings parents children etc 49 Recording Setting SMILE NAME DISPLAY SMILE NAME DISPLAY allows you to set the items to display when faces are d
239. nables decorations such as Tap gt to return to the previous screen EFFECT crowns or sunglasses to be added 5 Tap ON Recording with Face Decorations DECORATE FACE EFFECT ss p 41 pm TELE MACRO Records videos with various decorative stamps _ Recording with Decorative Stamps STAMP OFF ON HANDWRITING i i iti Records videos with your personal handwriting EFFECT or drawing Recording with Personal Handwriting HANDWRITING EFFECT t p 43 e After setting the tele macro icon 3 appears OFF Enables close up shots up to 1 m at the telephoto T end Enables close up shots up to 5 cm at the wide angle W end Enables close up shots up to 50 cm at the telephoto T end Enables close up shots up to 5 cm at the wide angle W end Caution When you are not taking close up shots set TELE MACRO to OFF Otherwise the image may be blur 38 Recording Recording with Animation Effects ANIMATION EFFECT You can add animation effects to video recordings The animation effects appear when smiles are detected or when the screen is touched The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Open the LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is pili f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si to switch the recording mode You can also use the pii button on this unit 2 Tap
240. nd in the animation on the Detailed User Guide Copying Backing Up All Files Before making backup make sure that enough free space is left in the computer s hard disk HDD Backup will not start if there is not enough free space Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit 2 Open the LCD monitor 3 Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter AC Adapter To AC Outlet 110 V to 240 V To DC PE an aa To USB USB Cable To USB Connector Provided Connector 1 1 Connect using the provided USB cable 2 Connect the AC adapter to this unit e This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter 3 The SELECT DEVICE menu appears 4 Tap CONNECT TO PC Ay SELECT DEVICE SELECT DEVICE TYPE TO CONNECT 5 Tap BACK UP Ll CONNECT TO PC BACK UP Tap X to exit the menu e Tap to return to the previous screen e The provided software Everio MediaBrowser 4 starts up on the computer The subsequent operations are to be performed on the computer 6 Select the source of the image file SD Everio MeciaBrowser 4 ewe poy x ul 7 tant Vesti Ales wthequtt betel Backup Step 1 Camcorder E Es gt mj EET ET i man Stcp 1 Vol clection Click Next Click All volume in camcorder 7 Start backup Saving Destination PC Step 2 Confirm e Backup starts
241. ne or computer while you are outside Recording of videos and still images may be performed while monitoring Videos and still images cannot be recorded while monitoring from the computer browser Image Monitoring via the Internet OUTDOOR MONITORING t amp p 140 DETECT MAIL e A still image is automatically captured and sent via e mail when faces or movements are detected by the camera You can also set to record videos on the camera during detection Sending Still Images via E mail upon Detection of Face or Movement DETECT MAIL t p 142 VIDEO MAIL e Videos of up to 15 seconds can be recorded and sent via e mail Record and Send Videos via E mail VIDEO MAIL t p 144 TV MONITORING e Connect this unit to the DLNA compatible TV via access point at hope using the wireless LAN router EASY STORAGE e Save all the videos and still images that have not backed up to your computer which is connected via wireless network The management file is saved as well Record of the location information e You can record the location information of the venue where recording is taking place via direct connection Wi Fi Direct with a smartphone supporting the GPS function The recorded location information can be used on the software provided with this unit Recording the Location Information t p 147 Pan Cradle sold separately Panning operation changing the camera to the left right direction can be remotely controll
242. ng 6 Tap the video to edit m TRIMMING 7 Tap Ii to pause playback at the desired start point then tap A ee KP gt ITRIMMING 0 01 23 O 0 12 34 KJK When A is tapped the start point is set e After setting the start point tap B gt to continue playback 8 Tap Il to pause playback at the desired end point then tap B vg XP 1 TRIMMING ES 0 01 23 O 0 12 34 A 0 00 23 MA Es CIECA When B is tapped the end point is set To reset the start or end point tap A or B at the desired scene position 9 Tap SET i II TRIMMING SD 0 01 23 A 0 00 23 OM RPL B 0 12 34 S e When SET is tapped the trimming area is confirmed 10 Tap YES DO YOU WANT TO CAPTURE A SPECIFIC AREA e After copying tap OK When copying finishes the copied file is added to the index screen Memo The division point may deviate slightly from the selected scene Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos A list created by selecting your favorite videos from the recorded ones is called a playlist By creating a playlist you can play back only your favorite videos in the order you like The original video file remains even when it is registered to a playlist e To create a new playlist Creating Playlists with Selected Files t p 85 Creating Playlists by Date t p 87 To edit or delete a created p
243. ng outdoors on a sunny day C lt PLAY l _ MENU shade to display the mode switching screen Tap M to switch the recording mode to Manual HALOGEN Set this when shooting under illumination such as a video light MARINE BLUE Set this when shooting the sea at deep water area water appears blue using an optional marine case MARINE GREEN Set this when shooting the sea at shallow water area water appears green using an optional marine case Using MWB 2 Tap MENU Hold a sheet of plain white paper in front of the lens so that the white paper fills the screen 2 Position the cursor to MWB and press and hold SET Or press and hold the MWB icon 3 Release your touch after the menu disappears and 4 lights up Memo iA __H PLAY L menu e The setting will not change if MWB is being tapped too fast less than 1 second e The top menu appears 3 Tap RECORD SETTING ya TOP MENU 37 Recording 4 Tap TELE MACRO Recording with Effects yma RECORD SETTING Ea You can add animation effects to video recordings Roe ai The animation effects appear when smiles are detected or when the screen is touched Type of Effect Description of Effect o Gi pg orr ANIMATION Records videos with animation effects gt EFFECT Recording with Animation Effects ANIMATION EFFECT t p 39 e Ta to exit the menu m pa a DECORATE FACE Detects faces and e
244. ngary Bahamas A Mozambique C Bangladesh _ Finland q Puerto Rico A Morocco C Philippines A BF O_ France C_ Brazil A C Vietnam AC Belgium Venezuela A Hong Kong Special Poland Bc Pew COC AC Administrative Region B BF Portugal B C Macau Special Romania O Administrative Region B C Malaysia B BF C 21 Getting Started Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling Change the date and time display to the local time by selecting your travel destination in AREA SETTING of CLOCK ADJUST Restore the region settings after you returned from the trip l Tap MENU lt PLAY 2 Tap SETUP HL Rec MENU ya TOP MENU 3 Tap CLOCK ADJUST Tap A or V to scroll the screen 4 Tap AREA SETTING CLOCK ADJUST AREA SETTING EEEE IEE EEEE r r lt q Time difference between the selected city and the GMT Greenwich Mean Time is displayed Tap lt or gt to select the city name Memo Setting AREA SETTING changes the clock time such that time difference is accounted for After returning to your country re select the region that was set initially to restore the original clock settings The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions 22 Setting Daylight Saving Time When ON is selected in DST SETTING of CLOCK ADJUST the time is set 1 hour ahead 1 Tap MENU lt PLAY 2 Tap
245. nual of the DLNA device in use 9 Images appear on the monitor of the DLNA device Operation on DLNA device From the following instructions perform operations on the DLNA device For details on using the TV refer to the instruction manual of the TV in use Memo e Ifthe DLNA compatible TV in use cannot detect Everio tap STOP to start from the step 1 again Caution This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention e We do not guarantee the compatibility of all the DLNA compatible TVs e This function is available when a connection to the access point is made with wires as well To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage 146 EASY STORAGE You can save the videos and still images to your computer by following easy steps Connect to the computer wirelessly via access point at home wireless LAN router What You Need e Computer install LoiLoFit for Everio in your computer Installing the Provided Software t p 115 e Wireless LAN router use a product that has a Wi Fi certification logo Settings Required in Advance 1 Registration of the required information for connecting the camera to the access point wireless LAN router is necessary Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS c p 164 2 Itis also necessary to connect the computer to the acces
246. o Scene Subject Common scenes that are often encountered can be recorded with the most suitable settings The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Select the Manual recording mode C lt PLAY Ii Rec MENU f the mode is A Intelligent Auto tap A on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap IM to switch the recording mode to Manual HL Rec _ menu e The top menu appears 3 Tap RECORD SETTING ya TOP MENU 4 Tap SCENE SELECT Wat RECORD SETTING Ea n a sia E Tap lt or gt to move to the previous next menu e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 32 5 Tap the appropriate scene pigs SCENE SELECT i zs 2 OFF _ NIGHTALIVE SPOTLIGHT Tap OFF to cancel the selection Tap X to exit the menu Recording The image is only an impression NIGHTALIVE Increases gain and brightens the scene automatically using a slow shutter when the surrounding is dark To prevent camera shake use a tripod OFF ON SPOTLIGHT Prevents the human subject from appearing too bright under light Memo e All scenes of SCENE SELECT cannot be set during TIME LAPSE RECORDING HIGH SPEED RECORDING or AUTO REC Adjusting Focus Manually Set this when the focus is not clear in Intelligent Auto or when manual focusing is desired The follow
247. o find the scenes you want to view later Hi Common for Android and iOS Tap Game Score Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 HPAUSE Ul af Ea je ee i 2 2 toe allig H5 PA P yigg Fause Marking 2 Tap the scorecard e Proceed to step 5 to keep the team settings unchanged 3 Tap TEAM SELECTION TEAM SELECTION TEAM LIST Tap TEAM LIST to change the team name and color and to adda team A Select the team then tap OK TEAM SELECTION VISITOR OK CANCEL 5 Tap to start recording the video 177 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Game Score 6 When the game is started tap Game Start Game Score 7 Tap the number when the score is added 178 nme Game Score BRR z v0 a a 7 Ba i ee Tap the number button of the scored team To modify the score tap the scorecard Tap the Undo button to cancel the latest score entry When the score is registered next entry cannot be made for 5 seconds 8 Mark the favotite scenes Game Score VISITOR e Mark the favorite scenes by tapping the flag icon 1 e Once a scene is marked the next mark won t be made within 5 seconds 9 When the game is ended tap Game End Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 e Tap Ok if DO YOU WANT TO EXIT appears e After the end of the game video recording is ca
248. o the video mode pial Tap 4 to switch to the still image mode A You can also use the sii IAl button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode 3 Tap MENU iil Rec menu 4 Tap EDIT 5 Tap PROTECT CANCEL vm EDIT PROTECT CANCEL 82 6 Tap on the files to protect or release protection of PROTECT CANCEL gg ie a v appears on the selected files To remove from a file tap on the file again Om and V are displayed on the files that are already protected To release protection of a file tap on the file such that V is removed Tap SEL ALL to select all files Tap REL ALL to release all selections 7 Tap SET to complete the setting pt Protect marks On appear on the selected files Protect marks Omn disappear from the deselected files Editing Capturing a Still Image in the Video During Combining Videos Recorded by Seamless Playback Recording You can capture still images of the scenes you like in the recorded videos Videos that are recorded on two separate media and with SEAMLESS e The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory RECORDING in the video recording menu enabled can be combined into a single video Open the LCD monitor SEAMLESS RECORDING GZ EX355 t p 227 The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Open the LCD monitor
249. off automatically to conserve power when it is not operated for 5 minutes only when using the battery pack AUTO POWER OFF amp p 239 When TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF is set to FACE TRACKING this unit detects faces and automatically adjusts its brightness and focus to record the faces more clearly Capturing Subjects Clearly TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF t p 44 Caution Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight Do not use this unit in the rain snow or places with high humidity like the bathroom e Do not use this unit in places subject to excessive humidity or dust as well as places exposed to steam or smoke directly The power may turn off to protect the circuit if the temperature of this unit rises too much e Do not remove the battery pack AC adapter or SD card when the access lamp is lighted The recorded data may become unreadable This unit is a microcomputer controlled device Electrostatic discharge external noise and interference from a TV a radio etc might prevent it from functioning properly In such a case turn off the power then remove the AC adapter and battery pack This unit will be reset Memo e Before recording an important scene it is recommended to conduct a trial recording Depending on the shooting conditions the four corners of the screen may appear dark but this is not a malfunction In this case change the shooting conditions by moving the zoom le
250. on CBA 1212TFR SW VM
251. on of connection settings between devices Search and A search is conducted to locate access points Register Select and register an access point from the list of search results Enter the name and authentication method manually to register an access point Enter the WPS PIN code of the camera to the access point to register Memo e By registering multiple access points you can change connection to another access point by tapping on the desired one from the list WE Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS Registration Tap MENU Operation on this camera CN REC ST MENU The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera yay TOP MENU 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera a oe rt 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 li Search and Register Tap MENU Operation on this camera 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera PLAY ii COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Rec MENU ACCESS POINTS The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi icon Operation on this camera 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera ACCESS POINTS 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera Wi Fi 7 Tap EZ REGISTRATION WPS Operation on this camera 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on
252. on the type of pet shooting conditions distance angle brightness etc and the subject direction of face etc It is also particularly difficult to detect faces of pets that are totally black covered in long hair or in backlight Subjects other than your pet may be detected by mistake sometimes Make use of PET SHOT only for pets such as dogs or cats After a petis detected and captured it takes time before the next recording may be performed PET SHOT does not work in the following cases when menu is being displayed when remaining recording time or battery power is being displayed when any functions in SPECIAL RECORDING is set Recording with Effects p 38 Caution e When PET SHOT is set to ON TOUCH PRIORITY AE AP will be set to PET TRACKING automatically Even when PET SHOT is set to ON if TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF is not set to PET TRACKING PET SHOT will be set to OFF automatically e f appropriate results cannot be obtained record with PET SHOT set to OFF 47 Recording NEED TO FIT FACE IN FRAME Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information By registering the face of a person beforehand focus and brightness can be adjusted automatically by the face tracking function Up to 6 faces together with names and priority levels can be registered It is recommended to register the faces tha
253. on this camera PASSWORD Ala ABC DEF xa emo TUV JWXYZ Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice Wi Fi or C by tapping 3 times A A A Tap DELETE to delete a character a TD me e Tap CANCEL to exit Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower A of case letter and number ir aa jana Tap or gt to move one space to the left or right The password is not required if the wireless LAN router is not security protected 4 Tap START p 10 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen g ee Operation on this camera Operation on this camera REGISTERED I ahahaha ea ach tala chai ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 Other methods such as Manual Registration and WPS PIN 5 Start making a connection Registration are also available Refer to the following link for details Operation on this camera Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS amp p 164 INDOOR MONITORING Connecting the smartphone or computer to the access point CONNECTING wireless LAN router Connect the smartphone or computer to the access point wireless LAN router at home This setting is
254. op menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera iil Rec menu Mai TOP MENU cN TA F 3 Tap DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING Operation on this camera 4 Tap HTTP PORT Operation on this camera 5 Enter a port number Operation on this camera Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Setting the UPnP of this Camera OUTDOOR MONITORING Obtaining a Dynamic DNS DDNS Account Sets the UPnP of the camera By obtaining a dynamic DNS account this unit may be used on the web as usual even if the IP address changes when making an access to this unit via Tap MENU internet ti thi AE a AAA eal Only the JVC dynamic DNS service can be set on this camera To obtain register an account perform the following steps Access the following URL from a browser and register for an account Operation on a computer or smartphone https dd3 jvckenwood com user Set your e mail address as the username 2 gt Check that you have received a confirmation e mail to the address used lt lt PLAY li MENU in registration and access the URL stated in the e mail Operation on a computer or smartphone e The top menu appears P EP 3 Set the username and password used in registration on the camera 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera Operation on this camera Setting Dynamic DNS on this Camera OUTDO
255. op video recording before taking still images If the SD card is removed and inserted during video recording still images cannot be recorded PLAYBACK FAILED Remove and re insert the SD card Inserting an SD Card p 13 Remove any dirt from the SD card terminals Insert the SD card before turning on the power Do not subject this unit to any strong impact or vibration VIDEO MANAGEMENT FILE IS DAMAGED RECOVERY IS REQUIRED TO RECORD PLAYBACK RECOVER Select OK to restore Videos that cannot be restored will not be displayed on the index screen but you may be able to play them back using PLAYBACK OTHER FILE in the menu PLAYBACK OTHER FILE amp p 73 256 UNSUPPORTED SCENE Use files recorded with this unit Files recorded with other devices may not be playable UNSUPPORTED FILE Use files recorded with this unit Files recorded with other devices may not be playable THIS FILE IS PROTECTED Switch off the PROTECT CANCEL function in the EDIT menu Protecting Files c p 81 CHECK CARD S WRITE PROTECTION SWITCH Set the write protect switch of the SD card to off INSUFFICIENT AVAILABLE SPACE Delete files or move files to a computer or other devices Replace the SD card with a new one Seamless videos cannot be combined if there is not enough free space in the built in memory GZ EX355 or SD card Check the amount of remaining free space before combinin
256. or drawing The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions I Openthe LCD monitor HE 0 00 00 0 53 Tap 7 to select the line color and thickness The number indicates the thickness of the line F Check if the recording mode is pil f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si to switch the recording mode You can also use the pimi button on this unit 2 Tap MENU A mI e You can select a color from white gray black etc Select to tap and erase part of the line e Tap amp to select the line color Tap to scroll through the list of colors Tap amp to select the line thickness Tap to return to the previous screen C4PLAY il Menu The top menu appears 7 Draw a line with your finger 3 Tap SPECIAL RECORDING j ya TOP MENU Q 7 03 F o 00 00 0 53 Tap i and the YES button to delete all the lines Tap ON OFF to display hide the lines e Press the START STOP button the camera to start recording a SPECIAL RECORDING Press again to stop aori CoO e Tap X to exit HANDWRITING EFFECT le i To perform operations other than recording tap X to cancel the mee li Op e Memo 1 e f the writings and drawings appear to be misaligned correct the touch 4 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen HANDWRITING EFFECT first position
257. orations such as crowns or sunglasses to be added The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Open the LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is pili f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si to switch the recording mode You can also use the pii button on this unit 2 Tap MENU HL Rec menu The top menu appears 3 Tap SPECIAL RECORDING Go to step 4 Alternatively tap DECORATE FACE EFFECT in the shortcut menu Go to step 5 ya TOP MENU DS fa E a ke ay gt 4 Tap DECORATE FACE EFFECT nia SPECIAL RECORDING HI ToD pees ual Seay e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 5 Select a desired effect and tap SET Tap lt or gt to select an item e Press the START STOP button the camera to start recording Press again to stop To select another effect again after tapping SET tap 5 Tap X to exit DECORATE FACE EFFECT To perform operations other than recording tap X to cancel the DECORATE FACE EFFECT first 41 Recording Recording with Decorative Stamps STAMP 6 Selecta stamp Records videos with various decorative stamps The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions I Open the LCD monitor 9 Tap W to start selecting a stamp Tap on the des
258. ored on this unit e After backing up your files using the provided software they cannot be restored to this unit e Delete unwanted videos before making backup It takes time to back up many videos Deleting Unwanted Files t p 80 243 Names of Parts Front N 3 4 SNAPSHOT Still Image Recording Button e Takes a still image Zoom Volume Lever During shooting Adjusts the shooting range e During playback index screen Moves to the next or previous page e During video playback Adjusts the volume Lens Cover Do not touch the lens and lens cover e Do not cover the lens with your fingers during recording Stereo Microphone Do not cover the microphone with your fingers during video recording 244 Rear PET DC Connector Connects to an AC adapter to charge the battery ACCESS Access Lamp Lights up blinks during recording or playback Do not remove the battery pack AC adapter or SD card POWER CHARGE Power Charge Lamp Lights up Power ON e Blinks Charging in progress Goes out Charging finished START STOP Video Recording Button e Starts stops video recording Strap Lock Grip Belt e Pass your hand through the grip belt to hold this unit firmly Grip Adjustment p 13 Lens Cover Switch Opens and closes the lens cover Names of Parts Tripod Mounting Hole Tripod Mounting amp amp p 21
259. ot be performed when an AC adapter is connected to the camcorder for battery charging You can bring an additional battery charger to charge battery packs if you plan to use the camcorder for recording at night You can also charge multiple battery packs by using both the battery charger and this camcorder at the same time E Tripod Showing Everyone Having a Good Time When taking a video it is rather dull to shoot only the scenery or historical sites Talk about your feelings while recording the breath taking scenery of an attraction so that it will be an interesting scene to view later A tripod is an essential item to take stable images Select an appropriate tripod in accordance to your purpose and style of traveling such as a compact one to be used on a table or one that is at least 1 m tall Recording the Excitement Before Departure It may be a little abrupt to start your travel video at the destination suddenly Record also the preparations prior to departure if it is a family trip or the time when everyone is gathered at the meeting place if you are traveling with your friends For overseas trips taking a shot of the signs and displays at the airport of the flight you are taking may be useful for future reference CO Cc 3 C Is cP CO A Fi p r Ti JA A H D C Useful Shooting Techniques Amusement Park Take more shots of the smiling faces of everyone in the family Taking Videos or St
260. oves to the ae l l ae d s In order for quality improvement defective recording medium is subject tapped position to be analyzed Therefore it may not be returned Pointer Displays the current estimated playback iti ithin th l calc Checking the Recording Date and Other Information Returns to the beginning of the scene Returns You can display the recording date and duration of the selected file to the previous scene if tapped at the beginning of a scene Pause the playback and press the INFO button e Allows the same functions as the zoom lever e To return to the playback screen press the INFO button or tap X to be performs while pausing playback Reverse search speed increases with each WAN np eena tap Reverse slow motion Press and hold to start reverse slow De z gt il Playbackpause Forward search speed increases with each tap Forward slow motion Press and hold to start slow playback Advances to the next scene e Allows the same functions as the zoom lever to be performs while pausing playback new Derrenewenen Memo e Tap or drag on the operation area of the touch screen Operations buttons on the touch screen disappear if the unit is not operated for about 5 seconds Tap on the screen to display the operation buttons again e You can search for a specific file by the recording date Searching for a Specific Video Still Image by Date t p 76 The recording date and time can be dis
261. p WPS l Tap MENU Operation on this camera 4 Tap START mp Set the camera to the recording mode Operation on this camera DIRECT MONITORING gt y PLAY il menu The top menu appears When iFrame is selected for VIDEO REC FORMAT the following 2 Tap the Wi Fi X icon display appears and recording mode is switched to the 60i mode in oer sit a AVCHD DIRECT MONITORING ya TOP MENU 5 Check the SSID and the PASS being displayed on the screen of the 3 Tap the DIRECT MONITORING aan icon in the Wi Fi menu camera Operation on this camera 133 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Wi Fi Eaj for oS amp 4 Tap START p Operation on this camera DIRECT MONITORING y gt When iFrame is selected for VIDEO REC FORMAT the following display appears and recording mode is switched to the 60i mode in AVCHD DIRECT MONITORING a 5 Tap WPS Operation on this camera DIRECT MONITORING SET UP Wi Fi SETTING ON CONNECTING DEVICE Lalit Bh peek leak hades PAS aad alah cea a ec STOP WPS 6 Activate WPS on the smartphone or computer within 2 minutes Operation on the smartphone or computer e To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 7 Aconnection is established and appears on the camera s screen 134 Monitoring the Images
262. perations buttons on the touch screen disappear if the unit is not operated for about 5 seconds Tap on the screen to display the operation buttons again e You can rotate a still image 90 to the right or left during playback Rotation applies to the on screen display only e You can search for a specific file by the recording date This is useful when searching from a large number of files Searching for a Specific Video Still Image by Date t p 76 Caution This unit is a microcomputer controlled device Electrostatic discharge external noise and interference from a TV a radio etc might prevent it from functioning properly In such a case turn off the power then remove the AC adapter and battery pack This unit will be reset 75 Playback Searching for a Specific Video Still Image by Date When there is a large number of recorded videos and still images it is difficult to look for the desired file from the index screen Use the search function to find the file you want You can search and play videos or still images according to recording dates The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory l Tap MENU Tap E to select the media for playback e Searching can be performed in both the video and still image modes The image shows the video mode 2 Tap PLAYBACK SETTING TOP MENU 3 Tap SEARCH DATE Wag PLAYBACK SETTING Mo am gt a W
263. pessacaeannmsneceseonsenonss 176 Transferring Videos AVCHD format ccccseeeeeeeeeees 179 Transferring Videos iFrame format ccccssseeeeeeeeeees 182 Transferring Still Images ee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeseaaaees 184 Smartphone Application Settings ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 186 Using the Wi Fi Function from a Web Browser 00 188 Indications ON the Screen cccsseceeeceeseeeeeeeseeesnenseeeens 188 Troubleshooting ossis E 191 Wi Fi Specifications ccs ccccciteccsictacenctscxncdccuvsdacenpeneniusecdaxcedeecenad 196 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 DIRECT MONITORING nnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnennsnnrrnresnnnrnresnsnnrenee 199 INDOOR MONITORING cccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeesaeeeeeeeesneas 202 OUTDOOR MONITORING ccccccccesseseeeeeeeeeaeeseeeeeseeeeees 207 DETECT MAIL eee eee eee ene eee eee ee ee 212 VIDEO MAIL es acteceeceteee nishane see eraa Enr ni iaaea 216 TY MONITORING sisieun naa tamer tennant ek eee ae 220 Settings Menu Operating the Menu ccccsssseecceeseeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeesneeeeeeees 224 Operating the Top MeN ccccsseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeeesneeeees 224 Operating the Shortcut Menu ccccccsseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 225 RECORD SETTING Menu video ccccccesseeeeeeeeeeneees 226 SPECIAL RECORDING Menu video ccccceeeeeeeees 230 Beginner s Guide Basic Way to Hold a
264. play back a few seconds from each scene of the recorded videos in the created disc Load the created disc on a player 2 Select DIGEST PLAYBACK on the TV The digest is played back continuously EF TA DIGEST PLAYBACK The screen does not appear on this unit Memo To normal playback To index menu 1 Press the top menu button on the remote control of the player during digest playback 2 Select the desired item e DIGEST PLAYBACK menu is not available when the disc is created using the provided LoiLoFit for Everio software e Digest Playback is not available when playing back by connecting this unit to a DVD writer or external Blu ray drive 79 Editing Deleting Unwanted Files Delete unwanted videos and still images when the space in the recording media is running out Doing so frees up more space in the recording media Deleting the Currently Displayed File p 80 Deleting Selected Files p 80 Memo Deleted files cannot be restored e When files in a playlist are deleted the playlist changes e Files that are protected cannot be deleted Release protection before deleting the file Protecting Files c p 81 Be sure to back up important files on a computer Backing Up Files t p 116 Deleting the Currently Displayed File Deletes the currently displayed file Caution e Deleted files cannot be restored 1 Tap Ke gt 0 0
265. played on the screen during playback DISPLAY DATE TIME ts p 234 e Displays the approximate remaining battery power during use The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Turn up the volume F GPS INFO NONE 65 Playback Normal Playback Plays back the recorded videos The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory I Open the LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is pi e f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap vii to switch the mode to video You can also use the sifi IOl button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode CN ME CO ena 3 Tap onthe file to start playback LE E J ECE ET n eem m gt Kak EA EE C arc CO CR ne Tap amp to select the media for playback and change the index screen thumbnail display Tap Il to pause Tap E to return to the index screen e gt appears on the last image played back Lines in different colors are displayed to distinguish the recording date 66 MARKING PLAYBACK The scenes marked while recording the video and the scoring scenes recorded in the game recording mode by using the smartphone application can be searched Also marked scenes and goal scenes can be extracted for playback extracted scenes can be saved as a playlist e Switch to the mark playback mode
266. puter Copy the files to a Mac computer using the following method Copying to Mac Computer t p 129 The computer cannot recognize the SDXC card Confirm and update the OS of your computer When your computer cannot recognize the SDXC card t p 14 254 Screen Image The LCD monitor is difficult to see The LCD monitor may be difficult to see if used in bright areas such as under direct sunlight A band or a ball of bright light appears on the LCD monitor Change the direction of this unit to prevent the light source from coming into view A band or a ball of bright light may appear when there is a bright light source near this unit but this is not a malfunction The recorded subject is too dark Use backlight compensation when the background is bright and the subject is dark Setting Backlight Compensation t p 35 Use NIGHTALIVE in SCENE SELECT Shooting According to Scene Subject p 32 Use GAIN UP in the menu GAIN UP t amp p 226 Set BRIGHTNESS ADJUST in the recording menu to the side Adjusting Brightness t p 34 The recorded subject is too bright Set the backlight compensation to OFP if it is being used Setting Backlight Compensation t p 35 Set BRIGHTNESS ADJUST in the recording menu to the side Adjusting Brightness t p 34 The color looks strange Too bluish too reddish etc
267. pying to Windows PC GZ E300 You can copy files to a computer using the provided software Discs can also be created using the computer s DVD or Blu ray drive If the provided software is not installed this unit will be recognized as an external storage when connected Memo To record to discs a recordable DVD or Blu ray drive is required for the computer in use e Still images cannot be recorded to discs using the provided software e Backing up of files using other softwares is not supported Trouble with Using the Provided Software Everio MediaBrowser 4 Consult the customer service center below e Pixela User Support Center Telephone USA and Canada English 1 800 458 4029 toll free Europe UK Germany France and Spain English German French Spanish 800 1532 4865 toll free Other Countries in Europe English German French Spanish 44 1489 564 764 Asia Philippines English 63 2 438 0090 China Chinese 10800 163 0014 toll free Homepage http www pixela co jp oem jvc mediabrowser e For details on how to use the software refer to MediaBrowser Help in the Help menu of Everio MediaBrowser 4 F Check the latest version online Click for Latest Product Info J Version infol A Mon Tue Wec Verifying System Requirements Guideline Right click on Computer or My Computer in the Start menu and select Properties to check the following items Windows Vista
268. r Tap CANCEL to exit Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap amp or to move one space to the left or right e The password is not required if the wireless LAN router is not security protected 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS 10 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera g plete tap Operation on this camera COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS REGISTERED SSID HTH ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 6 Tap ADD e Other methods such as Manual Registration and WPS PIN Operation on this camera Registration are also available Refer to the following link for details Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS ACCESS POINTS POINTS t p 164 WE Regular Operation Connect the TV to the access point e Connect the DLNA compatible TV to the access point this function is available for a connection via cables as well e For details on connecting your TV to a Wi Fi network please refer to the instruction manual of the TV in use 7 Tap SEARCH Operation on this camera Connecting This Camera to the TV I Tap MENU Operation on this camera e The search results appear on the camera s screen 8 Tap the name SSID of the desired access point from the list of search lt lt PLAY il MENU results Opera
269. r Reduces camera shake under normal shooting conditions W ON AIS video mode only shooting bright scenes on the wide angle end Only on the wide angle end approx 5x Reduces camera shake more effectively when Memo t is recommended to set the image stabilizer to OFF when shooting a subject of little movement with the unit on a tripod Complete stabilization may not be possible if camera shake is excessive When ON AIS is set the angle of view becomes narrower In the enhanced AIS mode the angle of view becomes even narrower than ON AIS Image stabilization only starts when the SNAPSHOT button is pressed halfway during still image recording Recording Marking the Video While Recording Slow motion High speed Recording You can mark a specific scene while recording video When a mark is made You can record videos in slow motion by increasing the recording speed to the marked position is recorded to make it easy to find the position and start emphasize the movements and play back the slow motion video smoothly a digest playback This is a handy function for checking movements such as golf swings The mark function can be used only for videos recorded in AVCHD format Video file in AVCHD only Videos recorded in iFrame format is not supported Recording Speed 300 fps I Image size 720x480 Open the LCD monitor Maximum Recording Time Maximum Playback Time Image Si
270. r use a product that has a Wi Fi certification logo Settings Required in Advance 1 Connect the camera to the access point wireless LAN router Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS c p 164 2 Connecting the DLNA compatible device to the access point this function is available for a connection via cables as well The above settings are not necessary if they have already been set for other functions Operation Method l Tap MENU Operation on this camera The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera HL Rec menu ya TOP MENU mS cS 3 Tap TV MONITORING ag Operation on this camera a am 4 Tap START p Operation on this camera TV MONITORING MAC OFF gt 5 Start making a connection 145 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Operation on this camera TV MONITORING CONNECTING Selle ee ee 6 Connection in progress TV MONITORING 7 After the connection is completed wait for the DLNA device to start up Operation on this camera TV MONITORING e f a considerable number of videos still images are recorded in the camera it may take some time to start 8 Operate from the DLNA device From the DLNA device access to the still image folder on Everio to select the images to playback For operation details refer to the instruction ma
271. r the camera operation is completed PLAYBACK ON PC e Operations are to be performed on the computer after the screen switches 127 Copying List of Files and Folders Folders and files are created in the built in memory and SD card as shown below They are created only when necessary CJ CJ a Still nage Folder JV OCAM_ MEM OCIM i 100UVCSO PIC_0001 JPG Built In Memary 101JVOSO Pic oo02 JPG stinger 102JVOS0 PiC_o003 JPG WVCCAM SD JO O Ei AVCHD BDMV STREAM e XX MTS JH video File Built in Memary BACKUP CLIPINE PLAYLIST INDEX BOM MOVIEORJ BDM EXTMOW DEM 0000 MIS 4 Dame Vides Fila MOV O001 MTS There may B no dermo vided file MOV 0002 MTS tMOV 0003 MTS Video files with detective managemen inka mation Management Indormatian 50 Card PRIVATE AVCHD L NC Caution When the camera and PC are connected by an USB cable recorded media are read only 128 Copying Copying to Mac Computer Copy the files to a Mac computer using the following method Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit 2 Open the LCD monitor 3 Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter AC Adapter To AC Outlet 110 V to 240 V To DC P com q To USB USB Cable To USB Connector Provided Connector L 1 Connect using the provided USB cable 2 Connect the AC adapter to
272. r the screen switches The image is grainy When digital zoom is used the image becomes grainy as it is digitally enlarged This unit heats up This is not a malfunction This unit may become warm when used for a long time Stop using the unit if it gets too warm The language on the display changed It may occur when you connect this unit to a TV with different language setting using an HDMI mini cable Operating in Conjunction with TV via HDMI p 78 When connected to the TV via the HDMI mini cable proper images and sounds are not output Images and sounds may not be output properly depending on the TV connected In such cases perform the following operations 1 Disconnect the HDMI mini cable and connect it again 2 Turn off and on this unit again Connecting via the HDMI Mini Connector t p 77 HDMI CEC functions do not work properly and the TV does not work in conjunction with this unit TVs may operate differently depending on the specifications even if they are HDMI CEC compliant Therefore the HDMI CEC functions of this unit cannot be guaranteed to operate in combination with all the TVs In such cases set HDMI CONTROL to OFF HDMI CONTROL t amp p 241 The unit operates slowly when switching between video mode and still image mode or when switching the power on or off It is recommended that you copy all videos and still images onto your computer and erase the
273. ration moving the camera to the left right horizontal direction can be controlled via smartphone by setting the camera on the pan cradle To use a pan cradle change the setting of AV TERMINAL in advance Change the setting from the menu screen of the camera Mi Changing the setting of the AV terminal e By default the AV terminal is set to AV To use a pan cradle change the setting as described in the following steps Tap MENU Operation on this camera HL Rec _ menu 2 Tap CONNECTION SETTINGS ya TOP MENU 3 Tap AV TERMINAL amp CONNECTION SETTINGS AV TERMINAL 4 Tap PAN CRADLE res AV TERMINAL O PAN CRADLE e Tap X to exit the setting screen Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 E Setting the camera to the pan cradle For how to connect the pan cradle and the camera refer to the instruction manual of the pan cradle for further details I Set the camera to the pan cradle e For how to connect the pan cradle and the camera refer to the instruction manual of the pan cradle for further details 2 Set the power of the pan cradle to ON e When the power is turned ON pan cradle moves to the left right to adjust the position E Operations from the smartphone application Connect the camera and the smartphone via DIRECT MONITORING or INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING Image Monitoring via Direct Connection DIR
274. rded R icon displayed P icon displayed Indicates that the current scene is marked Indicates that recording of the score is in progress Game playback Indicates that the game playback is in mode progress Score Displays the score of the game displayed only if the score is registered E During the DIGEST Game Playback gt e eem mes HOME 1 1 VISITOR 7 GE i 0 01 23 SE weno Date and time display Mark Delete button Deletes the mark that is currently displayed DIGEST Playback Moves to the normal mark playback Cancel Button Recorded time Displays the time that the video is recorded Indicates that the current scene is marked Indicates that recording of the score is in progress Game playback Indicates that the game playback is in mode progress Score Displays the score of the game displayed only if the score is registered icon displayed P icon displayed S oe ee Se Oo Playback Memo Adjusting the Marked Playback Position e Once a scene is marked the next mark won t be made within 5 seconds Specify the length of time before and after the marked position for playing back the marked video The maximum length of playback time per mark is 20 seconds The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions and built in memory Open the LCD monitor f the mode is still image tap MO on the recording screen to
275. rded by this unit to website for sharing files by using the LoiLoFit for Everio BACK UP Backup videos recorded by this unit to your computer by using the LoiLoFit for Everio Backing Up Files t p 116 Memo Before making backup load the SD card in which the videos are stored on this unit e After backing up your files using the provided software they cannot be restored to this unit e Delete unwanted videos before making backup It takes time to back up many videos Deleting Unwanted Files t p 80 E GZ E300 PLAYBACK ON PC e Displays videos recorded by this unit by using the Everio MediaBrowser 4 Installing the Provided Software Built in amp p 122 e Saves videos recorded by this unit on your computer without using the provided software Backing Up Files Without Using Provided Software t p 127 Copying to Mac Computer t p 129 CREATE DISC Save videos recorded by this unit on a disc by using the BD DVD drive on your computer and the Everio MediaBrowser 4 DIRECT DISC Save videos recorded by this unit on a disc by using the BD DVD drive on your computer UPLOAD Upload videos recorded by this unit to website for sharing files by using the Everio MediaBrowser 4 BACK UP Backup videos recorded by this unit to your computer using the Everio MediaBrowser 4 Backing Up All Files t p 123 Memo e Before making backup load the SD card in which the videos are st
276. rding mode is pi f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap vii to switch the mode to video You can also use the w i button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode CN MCE C ena 3 Tap MENU Cj 5 T Al i gt a g qo b S i Ned aha aS e Cea m TO 4 Tap PLAYBACK SETTING yam TOP MENU 5 Tap PLAYBACK PLAYLIST yg PLAYBACK SETTING J 6 Tap to select a playlist er PLAYBACK PLAYLIST 72 Playback PLAYBACK OTHER FILE The management information of a video may be damaged if recording is not performed correctly such as turning off the power in the middle of recording You can perform the following operations to play back the videos with defective management information The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Openthe LCD monitor e Check if the recording mode is pili f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap sii to switch the mode to video You can also use the W O button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode lt lt PLAY 3 Tap MENU Rec meny F hs si J k ia O s es b w W 4 Tap PLAYBACK SETTING 5 Tap PLAYBACK OTHER FILE ym PLAYBACK SETTING PLAYBACK OTH
277. rio sync 2 on the smartphone e Start the application after confirming that the smartphone is connected to this camera 2 Select the connection type to the camera Doe eee DIRECT MONITORING Fin CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME SCORING FUNCTION INDOOR MONITORING ig q CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT OUTDOOR MONITORING fara CONNECT VIA INTERNET NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT AND DDNS Demo Tap the current connection type e Recording screen appears 3 Tap Index 182 smn 0 TPPAUSE mm ee Aas ue Pause BMarking Game Score m 4 Select iFrame from the tabs in the lower part of the screen G 19 50 foohooOmO4s n 13 49 foohoomdss ey 11 00 foohoomd1s f J 11 00 fOohOOm01s5 C AVCHD Still Image iFrame Tap Monitor to return to the monitor screen Tap amp to move to the setting screen 5 Inthe index screen tap the desired images to transfer Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 19 50 foohdom04s Mal 13 49 OOhOOm0ss Mi 11 00 00h00m 1s MA 11 00 OOhOOmd 1s 2 C AYCHD iFrame Still Image Tap Monitor to return to the monitor screen Tap to move to the setting screen 6 Tap TRANSFER YOU CAN TRANSFER VIDEOS OR STILL IMAGES TO THE SMARTPHONE TRANSFER CANCEL Tap CANCEL to cancel the operation
278. rk places with minimal noise in the overall image Allows night scenes to be captured accurately with minimal noise in the overall image Prevents colors from fading even when recording in a bright environment such as snowfield and beaches Prevents colors from fading when recording a subject in a spotlight Reproduces the green color of trees vividly Reproduces the colors of sunset naturally Adjusts settings so that the subject does not appear too dark due to backlight Records while emphasizing the brightness of the colors Reproduces the natural colors of the outdoors during the day Reproduces the natural colors of the indoors ina cold color illumination Reproduces the natural colors of the indoors ina warm color illumination Selects the most suitable settings for handheld shooting Selects the most suitable settings when a tripod is used for shooting Memo e Scenes can be detected according to the shooting conditions and automatically adjusted in Intelligent Auto mode Multiple scenes may be detected depending on the recording conditions e Some functions may not work properly depending on the shooting conditions e a ee a e AIN Recording Operation Buttons for Still Image Recording SD i TA i D 6630 4 5 3 Operation Description Buttons Video Still Image Switches between video and still image Mode modes T W Zoom Allows the same functions as the zoom l
279. rnal Blu ray drive purchase the following USB conversion cable Part number QAM0852 001 Mini A Male A Female Consult your nearest service center 1 Press the eject button to open the disc tray 2 Load a new disc properly 3 Press the eject button to close the disc tray Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit Caution 2 Open the LCD monitor e Be sure to turn off the power when connecting the devices Otherwise electric shocks or malfunctions may occur e Do not connect the AC adapter provided with this unit to the BD writer Do not connect the AC adapter provided with the BD writer to this unit To WSs Ciiis t AG Adapter Th AC Ouieijiig Y baai vi t el Extemal Blu ray Cari 1 Connect the USB cable of the BD writer external Blu ray drive to this unit The USB cable provided with this unit cannot be used 2 Connect the AC adapter of the BD writer external Blu ray drive 3 Turn on the BD writer external Blu ray drive 4 Connect the AC adapter to this unit This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected e This unit turns on and the BACK UP menu appears e While the USB cable is connected the BACK UP menu is displayed e Refer also to the instruction manual of the BD writer external Blu ray drive 97 Copying Creating a Disc Creating a Disc Preparing a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive e Insert
280. ronment is adequate 1 frame per second may be reduced during video playback There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all computer environments e For more information contact your PC s manufacturer 114 Copying Installing the Provided Software You can display the recorded images in calendar format and perform editing using the provided software Windows Vista Windows 7 e Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide Windows XP e Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide 115 Copying Backing Up Files Before making backup make sure that enough free space is left in the computer s hard disk HDD Backup will not start if there is not enough free space Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit 2 Open the LCD monitor 3 Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter AC Adapter To AC Outlet 110 V to 240 V To DC eee cl i yT To USB USB Cable To USB Connector Provided Connector 1 1 Connect using the provided USB cable 2 Connect the AC adapter to this unit e This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter 3 The SELECT DEVICE menu appears 4 Tap CONNECT TO PC Ay SELECT DEVICE SELECT DEVICE TYPE TO CONNECT 5 Tap BACK UP mi CONNECT TO PC BACK UP Tap X to exit t
281. room Find out which door they will enter from and the route they will take from the person in charge of the wedding hall in advance Set up the tripod ata place where you can follow the couple using zoom without having to move around E Number of times and timing of clothes changing Find out the timing of any changing of clothes so as to capture the scene well when the bride and groom enter again You can also make use the time while the bride and groom are changing to record comments of well wishes from the guests Finding the Right Angle to Capture Both Bride and Groom Mi Composing the picture with the groom in front and the guests at the back The main characters of a wedding are of course the bride and groom Record their expressions clearly during the toast speech entertainment programs and other scenes Another recommendation is to capture the face shots of the guests then pan towards the groom Picture composition containing the crowd of guests only lacks fun so be sure to pay attention to the shooting angle and size Recording the Expressions and Comments of Guests Mi Setting the shot from eye level to chest level You can record comments from the guest by going around asking Please say a few words for the bride and groom This can be done at the guests waiting room when the bride and groom are changing or during the entertainment programs Useful Shooting Techniques Advanced Operation with Two Camcord
282. rried on until recording is stopped e Tap Monitor to return to the monitor screen in Step 1 Memo e Team name and color the background of the screen can be set prior to recording Select the score button depending on the type of the games e The next score won t be registered within 5 seconds after the marking operation But the score can be registered right after the marking operation by changing the game score setting Game Score Settings t p 186 W Screen display of the camera while recording the game score 1 Team name and score Team name can be set prior to recording use alphabets and numbers Game Score Settings t p 186 2 Game score recording icon Transferring Videos AVCHD format Transfer videos recorded in AVCHD format to the smartphone The video to be forwarded is converted to the following format Video Codec H 264 MPEG 4 AVC Baseline Profile Resolution 1280X720 3 6Mbps Bit rate is indicated in 640X480 1 5Mbps Start Everio sync 2 on the smartphone e Start the application after confirming that the smartphone is connected to this camera 2 Select the connection type to the camera _ s a ae Vem fue PE DIRECT MONITORING Fin CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME SCORING FUNCTION INDOOR MONITORING r CONNECT VIA ACCESS POINT NEED TO REGISTER ACCESS POINT
283. rvice center Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit 2 Open the LCD monitor 3 Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter To USB Connector E LEE TEC Pee E a Connect either 1 or 2 USB conversion cable Mini Male A Female optional QAMOBS2 001 USB Cable Mini A Male B Male il 0 DATA USB MAB 100 USB Cable Pro vided with External Hard Disk Drive Consult your nearest service center 1 Connect the USB cable with the USB external hard disk drive 2 Connect the AC adapter of the USB external hard disk drive Turn on the external hard disk drive 3 Connect the AC adapter to this unit This unit turns on and the BACK UP menu appears e While the USB cable is connected the BACK UP menu is displayed e Refer also to the instruction manual of the external hard disk drive Caution e Be sure to turn off the power when connecting the devices Otherwise electric shocks or malfunctions may occur Do not connect a USB hub between this unit and the USB external hard disk drive Copying All Files All videos or still images recorded on this unit will be copied You can also select and copy only the videos or still images that have never been copied The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Select video or still image mode 2 Tap BACK UP C VIDEO BACKUP BACK UP o C 7 mesme
284. ry if they have already been set for other functions 1 Registering an access point Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS c p 164 2 Setting the account for sending e mails Setting the Sender s E mail Address of the Camera t p 159 3 Registering the recipient s e mail address up to 8 addresses Registering the Recipient s E mail Address of the Camera t p 161 Operation Method l Tap MENU Set the camera to the recording mode e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon HL Rec MENU S TOP MENU 3 Tap VIDEO MAIL o 144 4 Tap VIDEO MAIL ADDRESS VIDEO MAIL To display the i icon tap the e mail address To cancel the e mail address press the icon one more time Up to 8 e mail addresses can be selected 6 Tap START mp VIDEO MAIL Or tap the REC on screen 8 Recording starts after the 5 second countdown e Recording starts immediately after pressing the START STOP button again during the countdown You can allow the recording to be performed for 15 seconds or press the START STOP button to stop Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 9 Tap SEND VIDEO MAIL SEND THIS VIDEO PLAY TO CHECK e Sending of the video mail starts To check the file tap PLAY TO CHECK When it is complete tap OK Caution Be careful not to cau
285. s FACE DETECTION Starts recording upon detection of human faces Setting the Detection Method of this Camera DETECT MAIL SETTING t p 163 e DETECTION INTERVAL Default 10 minutes Sets the time period to enable detection again after the previous one Setting the Detection Interval of this Camera DETECT MAIL SETTING p 163 e SELF RECORDING Default ON Sets whether to record videos on this camera during detection OFF Does not record videos on this camera ON Records videos on this camera Setting Self Recording on this Camera DETECT MAIL SETTING p 164 e VIDEO MAIL ADDRESS 153 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Selects the recipient s e mail address for video mails Sending Still Images via E mail upon Detection of Face or Movement DETECT MAIL t p 142 e MAIL SETTING Sets the e mail addresses of the sender and recipient Setting the Sender s E mail Address of the Camera t p 159 Registering the Recipient s E mail Address of the Camera t p 161 TV MONITORING MAC ADDRESS FILTER Default OFF By setting to ON Everio can be searched from the device TV monitor the MAC address of the device needs to be registered to Everio in advance OFF Disables UPnP ON Enables UPnP Enabling the MAC Address Filter TV MONITORING t amp p 170 e MAC ADDRESS LIST MAC address of the TV monitor can be registered to t
286. s To stop the self timer press the SNAPSHOT button again 3 Tap RECORD SETTING 58 Recording Using the Face Detection Self timer 7 After making sure that everyone is facing the camera press the Pressing the SNAPSHOT button starts face detection and shooting is SNAPSHOT button performed three seconds after another person enters the frame This function is useful when you want to include the photographer in the group photo Openthe LCD monitor and select the still image mode The still image mode icon appears 2 Tap MENU e Frames appear around the faces of the subjects e Pressing the SNAPSHOT button again starts the 10 second self timer 8 The photographer enters the frame Photographer The top menu appears 3 Tap RECORD SETTING The shutter is released 3 seconds after the photographer enters the frame To stop the self timer press the SNAPSHOT button again Memo e The FACE DETECTION function may fail to detect faces depending on the shooting environment 5 Tap SELF TIMER RECORD SETTING yam Ge yl e orr e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 6 Tap FACE DETECTION J SELF TIMER A 2SEC DETECTION 59 Recording Recording Videos with Date and Time 6 Select the type if the clock with lt or gt and tap SET You can record videos together with the date
287. s can be registered as recipients Caution When setting another person as the recipient be sure to obtain his her consent in advance Check whether notifications indicating errors have been sent to the sender s e mail address Make use of a computer or similar devices as it is not possible to check from the camera If no notifications are received Refer to Unable to send e mails and adjust the settings accordingly If notifications are received Check the content of the notification 162 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Setting the Detection Method of this Camera DETECT MAIL SETTING Sets the detection method to start recording I Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt PLAY The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera ii Rec menu ya TOP MENU 3 Tap DETECT MAIL Operation on this camera ie a eel en BS 4 Tap DETECTION METHOD Operation on this camera DETECT MAIL 5 Tap MOTION DETECTION or FACE DETECTION to make a selection DETECTION METHOD DETECTION DETECTION e Select MOTION DETECTION to start recording upon detection of subject s movements e Select FACE DETECTION to start recording upon detection of human faces Setting the Detection Interval of this Camera DETECT MAIL SETTING Sets the time period to enable detection again after the previous one
288. s out while SEAMLESS RECORDING is set to ON recording continues after switching to the SD card GZ EX355 only SEAMLESS RECORDING GZ EX355 0s p 227 e When DATE TIME RECORDING is used the date and time can be recorded together with the video Recording Videos with Date and Time t p 60 Caution e Do not expose the lens to direct sunlight Do not use this unit in the rain snow or places with high humidity like the bathroom Do not use this unit in places subject to excessive humidity or dust as well as places exposed to steam or smoke directly e The power may turn off to protect the circuit if the temperature of this unit rises too much e Do not remove the battery pack AC adapter or SD card when the access lamp is lighted The recorded data may become unreadable This unit is a microcomputer controlled device Electrostatic discharge external noise and interference from a TV a radio etc might prevent it from functioning properly In such a case turn off the power then remove the AC adapter and battery pack This unit will be reset e Disclaimer We shall not be held responsible for loss of recorded contents when recording videos audio or playback cannot be operated due to malfunctions in this unit provided parts or SD card Once deleted recorded contents data including data loss due to malfunctions in this unit cannot be restored Please be forewarned J
289. s point in advance The above settings are not necessary if they have already been set for other functions Operation Method I Tap MENU Operation on this camera lt lt PLAY The top menu appears HL Rec menu 2 Tap the shortcut menu Operation on this camera yay TOP MENU oy 3 Tap EASY STORAGE Operation on this camera Wag SHORTCUT MENU lt orr o Sy 4 Start making a connection Operation on this camera EASY STORAGE CONNECTING SSI Eee ee ee ee STOP Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 5 Connection is established backup starts Operation on this camera EASY STORAGE NOW PROCESSING SS 6 Everio Watcher appears on the task bar of the computer To see the status of backing up and remaining time move the arrow to it 7 Backup is completed Operation on this camera EASY STORAGE BACKUP COMPLETED TOUCH OK OR WAIT 10 SECONDS FOR CAMERA TO POWER OFF AUTOMATICALLY Tap OK or wait for about 10 seconds to turn off the power automatically Memo Recording the Location Information You can record the location information of the venue where recording is taking place via direct connection Wi Fi Direct with a smartphone af Memo e To obtain the location information it is necessary to connect the smartphone to the camera and start the smartphone application Also setting
290. se too much sending of e mails Depending on the internet provider that provides the e mail service the e mails may be marked as spam or the usage limited may be exceeded Be sure to check the terms of the internet provider in advance to find out if there are any restrictions on the number or size of e mails that can be sent When setting another person as the recipient be sure to obtain his her consent in advance e Depending on the e mail service provider the sending of video mail may not be supported Too much usage may cause high communication fees to be incurred and there may be a limit to the volume of communication For more details please check your Internet or smartphone subscription f you reply to the received e mail by using this unit the receiver can not check your replied e mail by using this unit Check the e mails sent by this unit from computer etc e JVC will not be responsible for any trouble that occurs upon the sending of mails Videos captured via video mail are not saved to the camera or SD card e Videos that have already been captured cannot be sent Image Monitoring on TV TV MONITORING You can connect this unit to a DLNA compatible TV wirelessly to playback still images on this unit on the TV screen This function may not be available depending on the DLNA device in use Connect via access point wireless LAN router at home What You Need e DLNA compatible device e Wireless LAN route
291. seas The shape of the power outlet varies according to countries and regions To charge the battery pack you need a converter plug that matches the shape of the outlet Charging the Battery Pack Overseas t p 21 Change the date and time display to the local time by selecting your travel destination in AREA SETTING of CLOCK ADJUST Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling t p 22 When ON is selected in DST SETTING of CLOCK ADJUST the time is set 1 hour ahead Setting Daylight Saving Time p 22 Charging the Battery Pack Overseas The shape of the power outlet varies according to countries and regions To charge the battery pack you need a converter plug that matches the shape of the outlet Middle East United States A_ Iceland C_ Australia O_ Israel C Canada lreland Guam Iran Mexico A United Kingdom BBF Tahiti Kuwait B Italy C Tonga Q Jordan B BF Austria C_ New Zealand Q Japan A Netherlands c Fii 0 India B C BF Canary Islands C Algeria A B BF C Indonesia C_ Greece C mar Egypt BBFC Singapore BBF Switzerland C Argentina O Guinea C Sri Lanka B C BF_ Sweden Colombia A Kenya B C Thailand _ ABFC Spain A Jamaica A Zamba BBF South Korea AC Denmark Chile B o Tanzania BBF China A B BF C O Germany C Haiti A_ Republic of South Nepal C Norway Panama A Omoa a GE Pakistan B C Hu
292. second intervals Recorded videos will be played back at 150 times speed 10SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 10 second intervals Recorded videos will be played back at 300 times speed 20SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 20 second intervals Recorded videos will be played back at 600 times speed 40SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 40 second intervals Recorded videos will be played back at 1 200 times speed 80SEC INTERVAL Takes a frame at 80 second intervals Recorded videos will be played back at 2 400 times speed Caution e This function does not support the iFrame recording format Audio cannot be recorded during time lapse recording e Zooming simultaneous still image recording and image stabilizer are not available in time lapse recording When recording is stopped with the recorded time less than 0 00 00 17 the video will not be saved e Seamless recording is disabled in time lapse recording Memo e Settings of time lapse recording are reset when the power is turned off To start time lapse recording again it is necessary to make the selection once more e Recording stops automatically 99 hours after it is started e Make use of a tripod and AC adapter for time lapse recordings with long intervals It is also recommended to fix the focus and white balance manually Tripod Mounting t p 21 Adjusting Focus Manually t p 33 Setting White Balance t p 36 55
293. seconds or more to turn off this unit and disconnect the USB cable Caution Ma _ 4 Tap the media you would like to make a backup e Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is complete 2 SELECT AND CREATE Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied SELECT THE MEDIA TO BACK UP Special files cannot be copied either e All DVDs will be finalized automatically While files cannot be added to the DVD R DVD RW later files can still be added to the BD R BD RE BUILT IN MEMORY SD CARD e DVDs that are created in DVD AVCHD format are playable only on AVCHD compatible devices Memo e A list of playlists is displayed on the top menu of the created DVD To check the created disc refer to Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive p 98 py SELECT AND CREATE Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 98 CREATE BY DATE To create a playlist Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos t p 85 SEI e a 5 Tap SELECT FROM SCENES video or SELECT FROM IMAGES still image SELECT FROM SCENES e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode 96 Copying 6 Tap on the videos or still images to copy oo SELECT FROM SCENES a V appears on the selected files To remove from a file tap on the file again Tap CHECK to c
294. ser 4 icon e The provided software starts up a da A LESH Pr ii Ever Medalna Medias 3ra 2 Display the month of the files to organize Recording Month Recording Date EEr ve a ol el L JL CwDaw 1 Input the name of the new user list Enter List name A new user list is added to the user list library Copying 4 Click on the recording day Recording Videos to Discs The thumbnails of the files recorded on the day are displayed Copy the files that are arranged using the user list to discs el Insert a new disc into the PC s recordable DVD drive gg 2 Select the desired user list Gum mg sip 5 Register files to the created user list A E mw B User List Thumbnails 3 Select the disc type oe Step 1 Disc type selecti SEN Select the disc type to create and the player type then click Next A amp You Ei ED Sora ay tee Costin Identifying Video or Still Image _aWT_ _ You can select files using the SELECT menu on the top right of the screen Check the video still image icon on the top right corner of the thumbnail Devre 0000 ume KE Rimzszbie Disk Ft Ez Library grew at y A iin y Sam PAA 2282010 31 n huez e files Still Image t tep1 AVCHD Select th file pe praa d Drop files here Memo
295. t are often being recorded by this camera beforehand The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions l Information is collected before face registration recording The frame Open the LCD monitor appears blinking while information is being collected e Adjust to fit the face within the frame while it is blinking The frame stops blinking and lights up after information collection is complete e To cancel the registration tap STOP When CANCEL FACE RECOGNITION appears tap YES to return to the normal recording mode Set the recording mode to either vi video or still image 7 Tap RECORD and record the face from the front To switch the mode between video and still image tap sii or Cl on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si or to switch the mode to video or still image respectively You can also use the sii IAl button on this unit 2 Tap MENU RECORD THE FRONT VIEW e A face is captured to be used on the face registration index screen Other than tapping RECORD you can also record by pressing the SNAPSHOT button fully Gy T EE MENU e A sound can be heard when recording is complete e To cancel the registration tap STOP e The top menu appears When CANCEL FACE RECOGNITION appears tap YES to return to the normal recording mode 3 Tap SETUP 8 Tap YES to continue recording CURRENT REC
296. t in memory Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit 2 Open the LCD monitor AC Adapter To AC Outlet 110 V to 240 V To USB Connector USB Cable To USB Provided Connector Ce Blu ra ray Recorder iT a 1 1 Connect using the provided USB cable 2 Connect the AC adapter to this unit e This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected and the SELECT DEVICE screen is displayed Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter This unit turns on and the SELECT DEVICE screen appears 4 Tap CONNECT TO OTHER Ay SELECT DEVICE SELECT DEVICE TYPE TO CONNECT CLIJ CONNECT TO OTHER 5 Tap the desired media O CONNECT TO OTHER SELECT MEDIA TO OPEN BUILT IN MEMORY SD CARD e The following screen is displayed after the camera operation is completed CONNECT TO OTHER SD CARD Operations are to be performed on the Blu ray recorder after the screen switches 6 Perform dubbing on the Blu ray recorder 105 Copying e Refer also to the instruction manual of the Blu ray recorder e After dubbing is complete disconnect the USB cable Operations Dubbing Files to a Disc by Connecting toa cannot be performed on this unit until the USB cable is disconnected DVD Recorder You can dub videos in standard quality by connecting to a DVD recorder e Refer also to th
297. tapped color subject when digital zoom is being used AREA L appears on the screen Recording is performed while SELECT automatically adjusting the tapped area fixed position with appropriate focus and brightness In addition a white frame appears around the tapped area AREA SELECT in TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF is only available within the optical zoom range unavailable Recording Memo e When TOUCH PRIORITY AE AF is set FOCUS will be set to AUTO automatically e Tap the selected position face color area again to cancel the setting Setting remains for registered faces e Tap on an unselected position face color area to reset e f the camera loses track of a subject tap the subject again e Settings are canceled when zoom operation is performed AREA SELECT only e When FACE TRACKING is set after face registration the blue frame appears around the face with the highest priority registered When recording registered faces using FACE TRACKING focus and brightness will be adjusted automatically even without specific selection In addition registered faces may be tracked back again even if they are lost Therefore itis recommended to register the faces that are often being recorded by this camera beforehand Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information r p 48 e When COLOR TRACKING is set the targeted subject color may change if sim
298. tessssssstsssessseeteesssan 146 Names of Parts Recording the Location Information ccccesseeeeeeeeeeees 147 Using the Pan Cradle Sold Separately ccceceeseeeees 150 Indications on the LCD monitor Changing the Settings sacarcncsesccnscaceicosnecoenmvareuidvactavecerncadeinens 152 Setting the Password DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR i O OOTD MONITORING 6 155 meOuPee noun l Setting the Enforced Group Owner DIRECT MONITORING When the unit is not working properly ccccseeeeeeeeeeeeees 250 oe dec E AE EE E TEA 156 Battery PACK sectsecascsiee y iieseeiiensaireenenennencateamnenatamenenmpenenea teen 120 Changing the HTTP Port DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR ASC OCG seers eases aae e eie ES 251 MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING 05 156 A PEEN AAE NEN EAEAN 252 Setting the UPnP of this Camera OUTDOOR MONITORING PIY 9 2 3 arree ne EEE ER 252 E T E E EE A EEE L sencrgusetensecese 157 Editing Copying sestetic55 cictrrenstetooredicientinnsiainadenneiekeneecteenitleb eee LDO Obtaining a Dynamic DNS DDNS Account 157 CONDOS esise nisreen ee E i pr apia 254 Setting Dynamic DNS on this Camera OUTDOOR Screen IMage ceeccccceeseeecceeeeeeceeuseeeceeaeeeseuaaseeseeaneeesssaess 254 MONITORING crcrsesnnsecenecinsag ne cenmnontesnesenseceeateecasteoseean 158 Other Problems ccccccseccceeceeceeseeceeceeseeeeeeeeesseeeeesseeeees 255 Setting the Sender s E mail Address of
299. the previous index screen thumbnail display Drag to left Scrolls to the left to show the next index screen thumbnail display Images with the same underlined color indicates the same recording date Playback During Video Playback Adjusting the Volume of Videos You can use the zoom volume lever to control the volume VOL Turn down the Caution e Make a backup of important recorded data It is recommended to copy your important recorded data to a DVD or other recording media for storage This unit is a microcomputer controlled device Electrostatic discharge external noise and interference from a TV a radio etc might prevent it g Display Deseripjon from functioning properly In such a case turn off the power then remove the AC adapter and battery pack This unit will be reset Video Still Image Switches between video and still image Disclaimer Mode modes We shall not be held responsible for loss of recorded contents when recording videos audio or playback cannot be operated due to wine erat Japona pa pom poston Mevesto ie malfunctions in this unit provided parts or SD card Epes berien l Once deleted recorded contents data including data loss due to Diag Diayeack Pointo Me left or right Starts malfunctions in this unit cannot be restored Please be forewarned pia eaeeTOnae ieee pasmon JVC will not be responsible for any lost data Please be forewarned Tap on a random position M
300. the Camera 159 Error Message asc ects tna cciee ce weedsaeecae eicanadcaeeweseniteceeen 256 Registering the Recipient s E mail Address of the Camera 161 Setting the Detection Method of this Camera DETECT MAIL SETTING a tech oeascederstbecsere shewatecssce anda fgg T mointenance Setting the Detection Interval of this Camera DETECT MAIL a SETTING cecccsscesesecesesesesesesssesesesesererseererevesereresereneeerenes 163 Specifications Setting Self Recording on this Camera DETECT MAIL SETTING iscnzcooceceuecxmnecdcsieansqeaxtasemeiandatendudandendetiecveincexseess 164 Registering the Access Points of the Camera to Connect ACCESS POINTS sacecevescossectatincscocSccecusxpees lt tenerdenteazeenas 164 Setting the Password DIRECT MONITORING 170 Enabling the MAC Address Filter TV MONITORING 170 Registering the MAC Address TV MONITORING 171 Checking the MAC Address of this Camera 008 171 Protecting the Network Settings with a Password 172 Initializing the Wi Fi Settings ec eeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 173 Changing the Panning Speed ccccsssseeeeeesseeeeeeeees 173 Using Smartphone Applications ccc seeeeceseeeeeeeeeeeeees 175 Indications ON the Screen ccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaaneeees 175 Using the Markings ccnsinsacnasniandneaviaisonsaieenmnnbeadntaepslgnipndestenasoas 176 Using the Game Score xciroisncsemnnsneesescsssa
301. the HDMI Mini Connector t p 77 Connecting via the AV Connector t p 79 98 Creating Discs with a DVD Writer You can copy the recorded files to discs or play back the created discs using an optional DVD writer Creating Discs with a DVD Writer E Preparing a DVD Writer Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD3 p 99 Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD50 p 99 Mi Copying to Discs Copying All Files t p 100 Copying Files by Date t p 101 Copying Selected Playlists p 102 Copying Selected Files t p 104 E Other Operations Playing Back with a DVD Writer t p 105 Memo Images recorded in UXP mode cannot be copied to a DVD writer e Videos in iFrame format cannot be backed up e When there are many files to back up it may take time for the backup to be completed Wait for a while as the access lamp appears blinking which indicates normal operation e Date and time information as saved as subtitles in the created discs Copying Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD3 Preparing a DVD Writer CU VD50 Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit Remove the AC adapter and battery pack from this unit 2 Open the LCD monitor 2 Open the LCD monitor 3 Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter 3 Connect the USB cable and the AC adapter To DG Connector To DC Connector To USB Connector m Outlet 110 V to 240 V m Ou
302. the SD card FILE Deletes all files on the SD card FILE MANAGEMENT NO Deletes all files on the SD card and resets the folder and file numbers to 1 Caution e Not available for selection when no SD card is inserted All data on the SD card will be deleted when it is formatted Copy all files on the SD card to a computer before formatting e Make sure that the battery pack is fully charged or connect the AC adapter as the formatting process may take some time 242 Settings Menu USB CONNECTION MENU Displayed when connecting the AC adapter after this unit is connected via USB E GZ EX355 GZ EX310 PLAYBACK ON PC e Displays videos recorded by this unit by using the LoiLoFit for Everio Installing the Provided Software t p 115 e Saves videos recorded by this unit on your computer without using the provided software Backing Up Files Without Using Provided Software t p 119 Copying to Mac Computer t p 129 CREATE DISC Save videos recorded by this unit on a disc by using the BD DVD drive on your computer and the LoiLoFit for Everio To create a Blu ray disc purchase a paid version of LoiLoFit for Everio http oilo tv jp product 33 page 27 DIRECT DISC Save videos recorded by this unit on a disc by using the BD DVD drive on your computer To create a Blu ray disc purchase a paid version of LoiLoFit for Everio http loilo tv jp product 33 page 27 UPLOAD Upload videos reco
303. the wireless LAN device in use and configure the security settings accordingly Failure to do so may increase the risk of personal information being intercepted such as user names passwords and the content of your mails or illegal access to the network e Due to the design of wireless LAN note that security may be breached by unusual or unforeseeable means e For more details on wireless LAN and network security please consult the manufacturer of your wireless LAN device e JVC shall not be liable for any security issues troubles damages or losses arising from the use of this feature Radio Waves Used by this Product This product makes use of radio waves in the ISM band 2 4 GHz Although a radio station license is not required for using this product please take note of the following E Do not use this product near the following places Industrial scientific or medical equipment such as microwave ovens and pacemakers Industrial scientific or medical equipment such as microwave ovens and pacemakers Specified low power radio stations radio station license not required Bluetooth devices Equipment such as the above mentioned devices makes use of the same frequency bandwidth as that of Wi Fi Using this product near the above equipment may cause radio wave interference and result in communication failure or a drop in communication speed In this case turn off the power of devices that are not in use
304. this camera 8 Activate WPS of the access point wireless LAN router within 2 minutes To activate WPS refer to the instruction manual of the device in use 9 After registration is complete tap OK on the camera s screen Operation on this camera 5 Tap ACCESS POINTS Operation on this camera REGISTERED COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ACCESS POINTS ENCRYPTION METHOD WPA2 6 Tap ADD Operation on this camera ACCESS POINTS 165 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 7 Tap SEARCH WE Manual Registration Operation on this camera l Tap MENU Operation on this camera PLAY il menu The top menu appears The search results appear on the camera s screen 8 Tap the name SSID of the desired access point from the list of search results 2 Tap the Wi Fi icon Operation on this camera Operation on this camera SEARCH SEARCH AGAIN yay TOP MENU 9 Register a password Operation on this camera PASSWORD ee 3 Tap gt on the lower right of the screen Operation on this camera Wi Fi a om na e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character o changes with every tap 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING ABC for example enter A by tapping once B by tapping twice Operation on this camera or C by tapping 3 times Tap DELETE to delete a character
305. this unit This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected Be sure to use the supplied AC adapter 3 The SELECT DEVICE menu appears e This unit turns on and the SELECT DEVICE menu appears 4 Tap CONNECT TO PC Ay SELECT DEVICE St a OF ED A TYPE TO CONNECT 5 Tap PLAYBACK ON PC CI Mele ies mi rele PLAYBACK ON PC e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen e The following screen is displayed after the camera operation is completed PLAYBACK ON PC The JUVCCAM_MEM or UVCCAM_SD icon appears on the desktop 6 Start iMovie The subsequent operations are to be performed on the Mac computer Caution When the camera and PC are connected by an USB cable recorded media are read only e MTS files that are copied to a Mac computer cannot be imported to iMovie To use MTS files with iMovie import the files using iMovie Memo e To edit view the files use a software that supports iFrame video AVCHD video JPEG still image files When removing this unit from the computer drag and drop the JVCCAM_MEM or JVCCAM_SD icon on the desktop to the trash bin iMovie and iPhoto You can import files from this unit to a computer using Apple s iMovie 08 09 11 video or iPhoto still image To verify the system requirements select About This Mac from the Apple menu You
306. tion Sending a Notification Mail I Tap MENU Set the camera to the recording mode 7 Tap SEARCH Operation on this camera ADD SEARCH HL Rec menu e The top menu appears 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon e The search results appear on the camera s screen 8 Tap the name SSID of the desired access point from the list of search results Operation on this camera 214 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 ya TOP MENU MOTION DETECTION DETECTION ON STANDBY 3 Tap DETECT MAIL e Detection is suspended for the first 5 seconds 9 DETECT MAIL detection in progress an e mail is automatically sent out prog y Wi Fi after detection is completed Pee MOTION DETECTION MOTION DETECTION IN PROGRESS 4 Tap DETECT MAIL ATTN DETECT MAIL e The PHOTO icon appears on the screen for about 2 seconds upon detection e mages are captured automatically when moving subjects or human faces appear on the camera s screen The PHOTO icon appears on the screen upon detection The captured still images will be sent via e mail to the selected recipients 10 Detection suspended 5 Select DETECT MAIL ATTN then tap DETECT MAIL ATTN FERLIEDE IEEE EEEE IEE EFE EI a aa C Until the next detection is made detection is suspended for the pre set length of time MOTION DETECTION DETECTION SUSPENDE
307. tion on this camera 4 Tap COMMON Wi Fi SETTING Operation on this camera Wi Fi 5 Tap MAIL SETTING Operation on this camera 6 Tap SENDER S EMAIL Operation on this camera MAIL SETTING RECIPIENT S EMAIL SENDER S EMAIL SEND TEST EMAIL 7 Tap NEXT Operation on this camera EMAIL ADDRESS ENTER THE EMAIL ADDRESS FOR DETECT MAIL AND VIDEO MAIL TRANSMISSION NEXT e Tap CHANGE to change the contents that are already set Enter the e mail address and tap SET SENDER S EMAIL i on a ino e Tuv lwxyz e Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap Tap DELETE to delete a character Tap CANCEL to exit Tap A a 1 to select character input type from upper case letter lower case letter and number Tap amp or gt to move one space to the left or right e After setting tap SET 8 Tap NEXT In case of Gmail tap SKIP Operation on this camera SMTP SERVER SMTP SERVER HAS BEEN SET AS FOLLOWS CAN BE CHANGED IF REQUIRED smtp gmail com CHANGE SKIP e Tap CHANGE to change the contents that are already set Enter the SMTP server and tap SET SMTP SERVER peer e Tuv lwxyz CANCEL Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap Tap DELE
308. tion on this camera e The top menu appears SEARCH 2 Tap the Wi Fi Q icon Operation on this camera wag TOP MENU 9 Register a password Operation on this camera 3 Tap TV MONITORING ag Operation on this camera Wi Fi Een rm ee Tap on the on screen keyboard to enter characters The character changes with every tap 222 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 4 Tap START p Operation on this camera TV MONITORING 5 Start making a connection Operation on this camera TV MONITORING CONNECTING SS Dacha aia aed aah ach te aaah hah lad aded 6 Connection in progress TV MONITORING 7 After the connection is completed wait for the DLNA device to start up Operation on this camera TV MONITORING e f a considerable number of videos still images are recorded in the camera it may take some time to start 8 Images appear on the monitor of the DLNA device Operation on DLNA device e From the following instructions perform operations on the DLNA device For details on using the TV refer to the instruction manual of the TV in use Memo f no image is displayed during TV monitoring tap STOP to start from step 1 ifthe DLNA compatible TV in use cannot detect Everio tap STOP to start from the step 1 again 223 Settings Menu Operating the Menu Operating the Top Menu You can config
309. tlet 110 V to 240 V Zee SOSIA A AC Adapter To AC AC Adapter To AC Gu mo 1 Connect the USB cable of the DVD writer to this unit 1 Connect the USB cable provided with the DVD writer 2 Connect the AC adapter of the DVD writer a Connect ihe AC adapterof the DVDwwiiter e Turn on the DVD writer Turn on the DVD writer 3 Connect the AC adapter to this unit ral Connect the AC adaptei METRE This unit powers on automatically when the AC adapter is connected Thisunitpoweis onautomalicalyWwhenthe AC adapteris connediod This unit turns on and the BACK UP menu appears This unit turns on and the BACK UP menu appears le Wie USB ce ee Cnnec eG NE BACKER went ls e While the USB cable is connected the BACK UP aan is displayed i i displayed e Refer also to the instruction manual of the DVD writer cis to the instruction manual of the DVD writer 4 Insert a new disc 4 Insert a new disc 1 1 Press the eject button l l Pull out the disc tray 1 Press the eject button to open the disc tray 2 y 3 Pull out the tray completely and load a new disc properly 2 Pull out the tray completely and load a new disc properly teas a l S 4 Push the disc tray in until it clicks into place 3 Push the disc tray in until it clicks into place Caution Caution l eB i tf th h imone deni Be sure to turn off the power when connecting the devices coe ees ss ance O
310. tly Recording Recording cannot be performed Check the vif O button Interior t p 245 When there are multiple light sources and depending on the shooting conditions exposure and focus may not be adjusted correctly in the Intelligent Auto mode In this case adjust the settings manually Adjusting Focus Manually t p 33 Recording stops automatically Recording stops automatically as it cannot be performed for 12 or more consecutive hours according to specifications It may take some time to resume recording Turn off this unit wait for a while and turn it on again This unit stops automatically to protect the circuit when the temperature rises The continuous shooting speed of still images is slow The continuous shooting speed will drop if this function is used repeatedly Continuous shooting speed may drop depending on the SD card or under certain recording conditions The focus is not adjusted automatically If you are recording in a dark place or a subject that has no contrast between dark and light adjust the focus manually Adjusting Focus Manually p 33 Wipe the lens with a lens cleaning cloth Cancel manual focus on the manual recording menu Adjusting Focus Manually t p 33 Zoom does not work Digital zoom is not available in the still image recording mode Zoom operation is not available in time lapse recording Simultaneous still image recording and image stab
311. to apply Select the video format when monitoring from a browser Full HD 1920x1080 MPEG 2 TS format f SD 720x480 MPEG 2 TS format MotionJPEG 640x360 MotionJPEG format Memo e The full screen button is not displayed when the stream format is MotionJPEG Caution e Features of the stream format are as follows Full HD SD MPEG 2 TS format Sound of the camera can be checked from the browser Recording operations cannot be performed from the browser MotionJPEG Sound of the camera cannot be played back from the browser Recording and zoom operations can be performed from the browser The monitor s image stops automatically after monitoring is performed continuously for 12 hours in Full HD or SD To resume press the reload button To use Full HD or SD it is necessary to install Media Player 12 in advance Lagging of the screen may be caused by the network speed or computer performance If lagging is severe reload the screen regularly It may take some time for the screen to be displayed after reloading For Full HD make use of a computer with the following system requirements CPU Intel Core 2 Duo 2 GHz or higher 2 GB memory or higher 188 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 E Video index AVCHD Everia En low lt npe ata i a T TEFA H ring WE Video index iFrame Everia En low To download a video click on the thumbnail E Still Image Index Screen Eyvyeria
312. ts is displayed on the top menu of the created DVD CANCEL To check the created disc refer to Playing Back with a DVD Writer 7 After arranging tap SAVE t p 105 Playing Back with a DVD Writer t p 105 pig CREATE BY PLAYLIST 0 999 To create a playlist i 7 ee Creating Playlists from the Recorded Videos t p 85 ea AB rey a TOTAL DVD 01 9 DVD DL 1 oa fiaa Si 8 Tap EXECUTE CREATE BY PLAYLIST REQUIRED DISC SPACE DVD 2 DVD DL 1 PREPARE AN EMPTY DISC CHECK e The number of discs required to copy the files is displayed Prepare the discs accordingly Tap CHECK to check the content After checking tap 5 9 Tap Ok CREATE BY PLAYLIST THE DISC TOP MENU HEADLINE WILL DISPLAY EITHER THE PLAYLIST OR THE DATE 10 Tap EXECUTE CREATE BY PLAYLIST REMAINING DVD 02 DVD DL 1 EXECUTE STOP When INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO EXIT appears change the disc 11 Tap OK when COMPLETED is displayed CREATE BY PLAYLIST COMPLETED 12 Press and hold the 9 button for 2 seconds or more to turn off this unit and disconnect the USB cable Caution e Do not turn off the power or remove the USB cable until copying is complete e Files that are not on the index screen during playback cannot be copied Special files cannot be copied either e All DVDs will be finalized auto
313. ts of the subject within the red frame are too fast or the changes in brightness are too small e Recording may start due to changes in brightness even if there is no movement within the red frame While zooming recording cannot be started 57 Recording Taking Group Shots Self timer 5 Tap SELF TIMER The 10 second self timer and Face Detection self timer are convenient I RECORD SETTING functions for taking group photos yam eS Gao The 2 second self timer is useful for preventing camera shake caused by i pressing the shutter button The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Memo A When shooting a photo using the self timer function use of a tripod is recommended lt Tripod Mounting amp amp p 21 e Tap X to exit the menu Tap to return to the previous screen 6 Tap 2SEC or 10SEC Bananas o OFF 10SEC FACE 2SEC DALAN Set the focus on the subject Using the 2 10 second Self timer I Open the LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is f the mode is sii video tap sii on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap to switch the mode to still image You can also use the pi button on this unit 2 Tap MENU N e When focused the focus icon lights up in green 8 Take a still image e A timer appears and countdown to shooting starts e The top menu appear
314. ultiple access points at the same time As such internet browsing becomes temporarily unavailable if the computer or smartphone has been connected to the internet via wireless LAN e Reconnect the computer to the wireless LAN router that is usually used for internet connection If the computer connects to the camera unintentionally remove the camera connection from the computer The registered name is DIRECT EVERIO Stop direct monitoring on the camera If the network speed is slow videos and audio sound may be interrupted or delay may become significant e For web browser Lagging may become significant due to the performance of the computer If the stream format is set to Full HD change to SD or Motion JPEG and try again Wi Fi Specifications t p 196 e For web browser If lagging is severe reload the screen regularly e For smartphone Try to change the place and time to locate an environment with good signal strength e To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage e When not monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera is fixed e Even when monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera will be fixed if not operated for more than 3 hours Focus works again when the camera is operated e Establish connection again at a place with good signal strength
315. und will be output from the browser If recording of the video is in progress no sound will be output from the browser Unable to access the entered URL cannot Check that the camera is properly connected to an access point wireless LAN router appears on be found the camera s screen Check that the computer is properly connected to an access point wireless LAN router Connection should be possible if it is connected to the internet Check that the URL is correct Unable to access the entered URL Enter your username and password password required The username is everio fixed and the default password is 0000 can be changed Video or audio is interrupted or delayed Ifthe network speed is slow videos and audio sound may be interrupted or delay may become significant e For web browser Lagging may become significant due to the performance of the computer If the stream format is set to Full HD change to SD or Motion JPEG and try again Wi Fi Specifications t p 196 e For web browser If lagging is severe reload the screen regularly e For smartphone Try to change the place and time to locate an environment with good signal strength The unit turns off automatically To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage Unable to set focus When not monitoring from a smartphone or co
316. unit the receiver can not S11 eee eee check your replied e mail by using this unit Check the e mails sent by this unit from computer etc e JVC will not be responsible for any trouble that occurs upon the sending of mails DETECT MAIL DETECT MAIL e CONNECTING MOTION DETECTION DETECTION ON STANDBY e Detection is suspended for the first 5 seconds 9 DETECT MAIL detection in progress an e mail is automatically sent out after detection is completed 143 Using Wi Fi GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Record and Send Videos via E mail VIDEO MAIL Videos of up to 15 seconds can be recorded and sent via e mail With this function short videos can be delivered easily even on a daily basis such as to show the growing up of small children to their distant grandparents T X Memo e Specifications of the videos sent via video mail are as follows System MP4 Video H 264 MPEG 4 AVC baseline profile codec 640 x 360 resolution 30p frame rate 1 Mbps bit rate Audio Advanced Audio Coding AAC system 48 kHz sampling rate 16 bit 2 channels What You Need e Wireless LAN router use a product that has a Wi Fi certification logo Internet connection Account for sending e mails Supports SMTP E mail services that is only accessible from the web cannot be used Settings Required in Advance To send e mails the following settings are required in advance The above settings are not necessa
317. unnecessary if the smartphone or computer has already been connected to the access point wireless LAN router at home PSE dahl dela ab dalla aaa Mi Regular Operation e Name SSID of the access point wireless LAN router in connection is displayed Monitoring the images by connecting the smartphone and the 6 The following is displayed when the camera is connected to the access camera point WE Operation on this camera I Tap MENU Operation on this camera e Tap URL to display the URL required for connecting the camera from browser lt lt PLAY il menu WE Operation on the smartphone The top menu appears Memo e Prior to use this function a smartphone application needs to be installed 2 Tap the Wi Fi X icon AE P Pee l on the smartphone Operation on this camera 5 ee Installing Smartphone Applications p 175 ya TOP MENU ER Start Everio sync 2 on the smartphone after setting INDOOR gt per gt As MONITORING 3 Tap INDOOR MONITORING Operation on this camera Tap START in INDOOR MONITORING on the camera to start Tap INDOOR MONITORING NO 205 Using Wi Fi by Creating a QR Code GZ EX355 GZ EX310 ee Ao CAMERA NETWORK INFO Bg URL LAN htt iad aa acacia als DIRECT MONITORING ahma ridai CONNECT TO THE CAMERA DIRECTLY YOU CAN USE THE GAME SCORING FUNCTION IND
318. ure various settings using the menu COET aie et Peo OT MENUSAR NISUN The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions e TOP MENU Menu that contains all the items specific to the video recording still image recording video playback and still image playback I Tap MENU modes respectively e SHORTCUT MENU Menu that contains the recommended functions for video still image recording The top menu appears e The menu differs according to the mode in use CN REC RT MENU 2 Tap the desired menu ya TOP MENU TA Q 3 Tap the desired setting ym RECORD SETTING x ee Memo To display the previous next menu Tap lt or gt e To exit the screen Tap X quit To display the help file Tap help and tap the item Help file may not be available for some items 224 Settings Menu Operating the Shortcut Menu You can configure various settings of the recommended functions in the video still image recording mode using the shortcut menu The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions l Tap MENU SPLAN L menu 2 Tap the shortcut icon Mai TOP MENU N v The shortcut menu appears i 3 Tap the desired menu and setting lt Shortcut Menu During Video Recording Mode gt Wag SHORTCUT MENU e Allows settings of EASY STORAGE ANIMATION EFFECT DECORATE FACE EFFECT
319. ut make sure in advance that you can establish a connection via the Internet by entering the URL WAN displayed in Network Information However you cannot monitor operate in the same way as while you are out when your smartphone or computer is connected via access point wireless LAN router at home Start using after changing the password If the password is not changed there is a high risk of unauthorized access from others Also avoid using easily guessable passwords such as birth dates You are recommended to change your password periodically Setting the Password DIRECT MONITORING INDOOR MONITORING OUTDOOR MONITORING p 155 There is no guarantee that the operations will work with all computer environments For example the video download feature of mobile safari browser etc is not supported Caution e Too much usage may cause high communication fees to be incurred and there may be a limit to the volume of communication For more details please check your Internet or smartphone subscription If the network connection is slow video images may appear jumpy or audio sound may be interrupted or delayed This function is not designed for disaster or crime prevention To prevent the situation of forgetting to turn off the power this unit will turn off automatically after 10 days of continuous usage When not monitoring from a smartphone or computer the focus of the camera is fixed
320. ver etc 29 Recording Zooming The angle of view can be adjusted using Zoom e Use the W end wide angle end to shoot a wider field of view e Use the T end telephoto end to magnify the subject for shooting wo MCOT F VOL b A A ap OOo s rs Bo eT la P T o Ne fe iw Q Te TAr Aa A wll ie F gt ey as o y Se i cy P N f ST LAD BE Wide Angle Telephoto e The following Zoom options are available Optical Zoom 1 40x Digital Zoom 41 200x e You can also use the zoom T W button on the touch screen to zoom Zoom Button T W Memo e When digital zoom is used the image becomes grainy as it is digitally enlarged The zoom ratio range can be changed ZOOM t amp p 228 30 Manual Recording You can adjust settings such as brightness by using the manual mode Manual recording can be set for both video and still image modes The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Open the lens cover e Set the recording mode to either si video or still image To switch the mode between video and still image tap sil or O on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap si or to switch the mode to video or still image respectively You can also use the si I button on this unit 3 Select the Manual recording mode lt lt PLAY HC REC MENU If the mode is A Intelligent Auto tap
321. video is digested in the pre set length of time Start the playback from DIGEST PLAYBACK in the PLAYBACK SETTING menu PLAYBACK Plays back the playlists that you have created PLAYLIST Start the playback from PLAYBACK PLAYLIST in the PLAYBACK SETTING menu Mi Switching to the video playback screen I Open the LCD monitor Check if the recording mode is pil f the mode is still image tap on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap vii to switch the mode to video You can also use the sifi IOl button on this unit 2 Tap lt lt PLAY to select the playback mode CN O MCE ST ea 3 The video playback screen is displayed 64 Operation Buttons for Video Playback During Index Screen Display Switches between video and still image modes Moves to the previous next date Displays the next index screen thumbnail display e You can perform the same operation with the zoom lever Displays the previous index screen thumbnail display e You can perform the same operation with the zoom lever Switches to the recording mode Moves to the mark playback mode MARKING PLAYBACK p 66 Displays the index screen thumbnail display to perform deletion Switches between the index screen of the built in memory and SD card Displays the menu screen Tap on thumbnail Starts playback Drag to right Scrolls to the right to show
322. when the image stabilizer is turned on or off ZOOM MIC Sets the zoom microphone Records audio sounds in the same direction as the zoom operation MIC LEVEL Make the adjustments such that MIC LEVEL does not turn red Hides display of microphone input level 228 Settings Menu Shows display of microphone input level MIC LEVEL SETTING Sets the microphone level Make the adjustments such that MIC LEVEL does not turn red Increases the microphone input level slightly 0 The microphone input level is not changed Decreases the microphone input level slightly K2 TECHNOLOGY Reduces the degradation of sound quality caused by digital signal processing and records a sound quality close to the original 229 Settings Menu SPECIAL RECORDING Menu video Pe LAA HIGH SPEED RECORDING You can record videos in slow motion by increasing the recording speed to emphasize the movements and play back the slow motion video smoothly This is a handy function for checking movements such as golf swings Slow motion High speed Recording t p 53 TIME LAPSE RECORDING This function enables the changes of a scene that occur slowly over a long period to be shown within a short time by taking frames of it at a certain interval This is useful for making observations such as the opening of a flower bud Recording at Intervals TIME LAPSE RECORDING t p 54 STOP MOTION REC
323. widescreen TV 16 9 HDMI OUTPUT Sets the output from the HDMI connector of this unit when it is connected to a TV HDMI CONTROL Sets whether to link operations with an HDMI CEC compliant TV Turns off linked operations AV TERMINAL Set the output connector of PAN CRADLE Set this when the output is made via the AV connector PAN CRADLE Set this to use the Pan Cradle 241 Settings Menu MEDIA SETTINGS video still image REC MEDIA FOR VIDEO GZ EX355 Sets the recording playback media of videos BUILT IN MEMORY Records videos to this unit s built in memory SD CARD Records videos to the SD card REC MEDIA FOR IMAGE GZ EX355 Sets the recording playback media of still images BUILT IN MEMORY Records still images to this unit s built in memory SD CARD Records still images to the SD card FORMAT BUILT IN MEM GZ EX355 Deletes all files on the built in memory FILE Deletes all files on the built in memory FILE MANAGEMENT NO Deletes all files on the built in memory and resets the folder and file numbers to 1 File number of the AVCHD video file starts from O Caution e All data on the built in memory will be deleted when it is formatted Copy all files on the built in memory to a computer before formatting e Make sure that the battery pack is fully charged or connect the AC adapter as the formatting process may take some time FORMAT SD CARD Deletes all files on
324. will be finalized automatically While files cannot be added to the DVD R DVD RW later files can still be added to the BD R BD RE DVDs that are created in DVD AVCHD format are playable only on AVCHD compatible devices Memo To check the created disc refer to Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 98 Playing Back with a BD Writer External Blu ray Drive t p 98 Copying Files by Date Videos or still images are sorted and copied according to the date on which they were recorded e The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory Select video or still image mode 2 Tap SELECT AND CREATE video or SELECT AND SAVE still image wd VIDEO BACKUP CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE PLAYBACK e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode Tap vi to switch between the video and still image modes 3 Tap Blu ray DISC or DVD AVCHD amp SELECT AND CREATE CHANGE REC MEDIA e The media changes to the tapped item Select the appropriate setting according to the disc e Selecting Blu ray DISC enables you to save videos in a Blu ray disc in the high definition quality e Selecting DVD AVCHD enables you to save videos in a DVD in the high definition quality 4 Tap the media you would like to make a backup amp amp SELECT AND CREATE SELE
325. y Protecting Releasing Protection of the Currently Displayed File p 81 Protecting Releasing Protection of Selected Files t p 82 COPY GZ EX355 Copies files from the built in memory to the SD card Copying Files to an SD Card GZ EX355 t p 112 MOVE GZ EX355 Moves files from the built in memory to the SD card Files that are moved to the SD card will be deleted from the built in memory Moving Files to an SD Card GZ EX355 p 113 237 Settings Menu SETUP video still image Mobile User Guide Displays the QR code to access the Mobile User Guide MOBILE USER GUIDE Cim te Tie IES The portal site appears when the QR code has been read correctly Select the model name of your camera to display its Mobile User Guide Memo To read the QR code a relevant application is required Enter the URL in the internet browser manually if the QR code cannot be read e The Mobile User Guide is supported by Android devices and iPhone You can view it on standard browsers such as Google Chrome Android and Mobile Safari iPhone e QR Code is a registered trademark of Denso Wave Incorporated CLOCK ADJUST Resets the current time or sets to the local time when using this unit overseas Clock Setting p 18 Setting the Clock to Local Time when Traveling p 22 Setting Daylight Saving Time p 22 DATE DISPLAY STYLE Sets the order of year month da
326. y and the time display format 24H 12H Sorting Order Time Display LANGUAGE The language on the display can be changed Changing the Display Language t p 20 FACE REGISTRATION recording only Registers the faces of people who are often shot with this unit Registering Human Face Personal Authentication Information t p 48 MONITOR BRIGHTNESS Sets the brightness of the LCD monitor AUTO Sets the brightness automatically to 4 when using outdoors and to 3 when using indoors Brightens the backlight of the monitor regardless of the surrounding conditions 200 f Darkens the Darkens the backlight of the monitor regardless of the surrounding conditions of the monitor regardless of the surrounding conditions Sets to dim brightness Helps to save battery life when selected 238 Settings Menu OPERATION SOUND Turns on or off the operation sound AUTO POWER OFF Prevents the situation of forgetting to turn off the power when this is set Memo When using battery power is turned off automatically if this unit is not operated for 5 minutes When using the AC adapter this unit goes into standby mode QUICK RESTART Enables the power to turn on quickly when the LCD monitor is opened again within 5 minutes Memo e The power consumption within 5 minutes after the LCD monitor is closed is reduced DEMO MODE Plays a demonstration of the special features of this unit
327. y captures a still image upon detection of the face of a pet such as dogs or cats Capturing Pets Automatically PET SHOT t p 46 SEAMLESS RECORDING GZ EX355 Continues recording on the SD card without stopping when the remaining space on the built in memory runs out Does not switch recording media automatically Memo e Seamless recording cannot be performed if there is not enough free space in the SD card e x appears if seamless recording cannot be performed e To start seamless recording again after the previous session is complete it is necessary to combine seamless videos or delete the combination information of the seamless videos e Seamless recording can be performed if the video recording format is iFrame Combining Videos Recorded by Seamless Recording p 83 VIDEO REC FORMAT Select the recording format from AVCHD or iFrame which is suitable for importing to iMovie AVCHD Records in AVCHD format iFrame Record in iFrame format which is suitable for importing to iMovie GZ EX355 GZ EX310 Memo e iFrame is a recording format to be handled by the Mac computer Operation on the Windows PC is not guaranteed 227 Settings Menu VIDEO QUALITY Sets the video quality if the video recording format is AVCHD UXP Enables recording in the best picture quality e Applies to Blu ray discs only Videos taken in high definition quality cannot be saved to DVDs r z
328. y the files is displayed Prepare the discs accordingly Tap CHECK to check the content 95 Copying 10 Tap Ok Copying Selected Files Select and copy the desired videos or still images individually The following is a screen of the model with the built in memory CREATE BY PLAYLIST THE DISC TOP MENU HEADLINE WILL DISPLAY EITHER THE PLAYLIST OR THE DATE Select video or still image mode 2 Tap SELECT AND CREATE video or SELECT AND SAVE still image e1 VIDEO BACKUP CREATE FROM ALL SELECT AND CREATE 11 Tap EXECUTE CREATE BY PLAYLIST REMAINING DVD 02 DVD DL 1 EXECUTE STOP PLAYBACK e While the video mode is shown in the image the same operations apply for the still image mode Tap vii to switch between the video and still image modes 3 Tap Blu ray DISC or DVD AVCHD amp SELECT AND CREATE When INSERT THE NEXT DISC TO CREATE OR PRESS STOP TO EXIT appears change the disc 12 Tap OK when COMPLETED is displayed CHANGE REC MEDIA e The media changes to the tapped item Select the appropriate setting according to the disc e Selecting Blu ray DISC enables you to save videos in a Blu ray disc in the high definition quality Selecting DVD AVCHD enables you to save videos in a DVD in the high definition quality CREATE BY PLAYLIST COMPLETED 13 Press and hold the button for 2
329. ying System Requirements Guideline Right click on Computer or My Computer in the Start menu and select Properties to check the following items Windows Vista Windows 7 e Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide Windows XP e Refer to the operating instructions found in the animation on the Detailed User Guide Windows Vista Windows 7 Windows XP OS Windows Vista 32 64 bit Windows XP Home Basic or Home Premium Home Edition or Professional Pre installed versions only Service Pack 2 Pre installed versions only Service Pack 3 Windows 7 32 64 bit Home Premium Pre installed versions only Service Pack 1 Intel Core 2 Duo CPU 2 GHz or higher At least 2 GB Graphics during playback backing up Intel 965 or later NVIDIA Geforce 6000 series or later ATI Radeon 9600 or later during video editing creating a disc converting video uploading Intel G45 or later NVIDIA Geforce 8000 series or later except for 8800GTX and 8300 ATI Radeon HD2000 series or later except for 2900 E Other requirements e VRAM 256MB or higher Microsoft NET Framework 3 5 SP1 needs to be installed To edit playback videos the use of a computer with Intel Core i7 4 core CPU is recommended Memo f your PC does not meet the above system requirements operations of the provided software cannot be guaranteed e Depending on the PC environment even if the operating envi
330. your body to face the front Record for another 2 seconds while facing the front then press the stop button The 90 degrees rotation should take about 5 seconds giving the feeling of a slow motion Extend your hand when your subject is being hidden behind a crowd of people E Getting Ready 1 Open your feet to the width of your shoulders 2 Extend your right hand and hold the camcorder over your head 3 Hold the LCD monitor with your left hand and adjust the angle accordingly Caution e Use this way of shooting only as a last resort as it is difficult to achieve stable images Set to the wide angle as much as possible as the image will be prone to camera shake e Be considerate Do not inconvenience the people around you Useful Shooting Techniques Holiday Season Christmas Recording the Christmas Party Record the happy Christmas celebration with your family Photo by 101st CAB Wings of Destiny Photo by InnerSpirit Creative Commons Attribution No Derivative Works 3 0 Creative Commons Attribution No Derivative Works 3 0 OO After all preparations it is finally the Christmas party itself Not only should you record the candle blowing scene but also the smiles of the family while Decorating the Tree and Preparing the Dinner being surrounded by good food or even the father who is slightly drunk from The decoration of tree and preparation of dinner are part of the joy of champagn
331. ze when Connected to Monitor 1920x1080 The playback time will be 5 times of the actual recorded time Example If the recorded time is 1 minute the playback time will be 5 minutes The following is a screen of the model with Wi Fi functions Open the LCD monitor e Press the START STOP button again to stop recording e Check if the recording mode is wk 3 Tap the mark icon at the scene you want to mark f the mode is still image tap A on the recording screen to display the mode switching screen Tap vai to switch the mode to video You can also use the 8 0 button on this unit 2 Tap MENU HL Rec _ Menu e Once a scene is marked the next mark won t be made within 5 seconds 4 End recording a video lt lt PLAY Rec MENU e The top menu appears 3 Tap SPECIAL RECORDING Mai TOP MENU e Tap GE to end the video recording Memo e Refer to the below for playing back the marked scenes MARKING PLAYBACK t p 66 e By installing a specialized application in your smartphone the mark operation can be done from the smartphone GZ EX310 355 Using the Markings p 176 53 Recording 4 Tap HIGH SPEED RECORDING Recording at Intervals TIME LAPSE pal SPECIAL RECORDING RECORDING ir alll 2 F This function enables the changes of a scene that occur slowly over a long period to be shown within a short time by ta

Acu-Rite 516353-21 Automobile Accessories User Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents